(emacs_ospeed): New variable.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
4104194e
GM
44** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
45be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
46
c6f01e00
MB
47** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
48To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
49`auto-compression-mode' command.
50
4c724b32
DL
51** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
52`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
53
b856f39c 54+++
068127d6
GM
55** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
56operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
57
fd06c7da
MB
58** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
59(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
60remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
61may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
62
8ac08dea 63+++
62c273d7
DL
64** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
65is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
66
67+++
68** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
69mode `iswitchb-mode'.
70
8ac08dea 71+++
f393cf90
DL
72** Gnus changes.
73
74The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
75four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
76internationalization and mail-fetching.
77
78*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
79many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
80
81If you used procmail like in
82
83(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
84(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
85(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
86(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
87
327652be 88this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
89
90(setq mail-sources
91 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
92 :suffix ".in")))
93
94More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
95Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
96
97*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
98Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
99Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
100probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 101
60dd7e0e 102*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
103parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
104are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
105now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
106
107*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
108called to position point.
109
110*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
111summary buffers and NOV files.
112
113*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
114of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
115
116*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
117subtly different manner.
118
119*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
120and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
121ever-changing layouts.
122
123*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
124
125*** There is image support.
126
127** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1288859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
129more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
130empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
131window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
132on.
133
ba9eeda1
GM
134** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
135set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
136file that is already visited under a different name.
137
42ac0ae5
GM
138** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
139nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
140
141** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
142recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
143signaled.
144
ba9eeda1 145** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
146support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
147use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
148buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
149M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
150new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
151
b941a14b 152+++
ba9eeda1 153** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 154and displays information about that.
b941a14b 155
ba9eeda1 156** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
157file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
158
d7b38c05 159** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 160added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
161Postscript files are included.
162
163** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
164`dired-ref.tex'.
165
25ad1371
GM
166** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
167expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
168
169This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
170determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
171mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
172interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
173regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
174associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
175
b856f39c 176+++
f0298744
DL
177** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
178displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
179menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
180menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
181
9a8d84ca
DL
182** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
183a version-dependent component.
184
d76c03ea
GM
185** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
186Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
187will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
188character is still bound as before.
189
3b4fa1b2
DL
190** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
191using that menu.
192
40e857ea 193** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 194suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 195
beb2eb00 196+++
c08398de
DL
197** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
198buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
199contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
200by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
201insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
202the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
203Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
204
db7a3ede 205+++
3d6cd763
GM
206** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
207coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
208escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
209such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
210recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 211always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 212read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
213(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
214RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 215
0b8a3a6d
DL
216** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
217environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
218
424d8b44 219+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
220** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
221point in a pop-up window.
222
6d35b49f 223+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
225displays all characters in that character set.
226
227** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
228coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
229
a4067978 230+++
5cb6a58e 231** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 232on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
233defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
234commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 235
424d8b44 236+++
a1b8d58b
GM
237** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
238
6e417ca5
DL
239** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
240been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
241
424d8b44 242+++
5898e075
DL
243** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
244`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
245indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
246indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
247
424d8b44 248+++
abfcc168
GM
249** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
250sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 251(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
252You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
253
424d8b44 254+++
cc181e95
GM
255** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
256on the display using several methods
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
260a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
261be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
262
424d8b44 263+++
cc181e95
GM
264- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
265equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
266
da4496b6 267- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
268
269- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
270the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
271
424d8b44 272+++
3b4fa1b2 273** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 274an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 275command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 276does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 277
424d8b44 278+++
176256a1 279** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
280`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
281typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 282
dd0add8e
DL
283** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
284characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
285
bf3ba9ac 286+++
699238d9
GM
287** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
288compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
289this behavior.
290
291The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
292compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
293Emacs dump core.
294
424d8b44 295+++
699238d9 296** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 297
7233c5bd
GM
298*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
299whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
300is useful for debugging X problems.
301
302Example:
303
699238d9 304 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 305
100b3cbb
GM
306*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
307visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
308the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
309and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
310visual class names are
311
312 TrueColor
313 PseudoColor
314 DirectColor
315 StaticColor
316 GrayScale
317 StaticGray
318
319Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
320`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
321meaning.
322
323The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
324supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
325`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
326visual.
327
328Example:
329
699238d9 330 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
331
332*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
333specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
334default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
335resource values are `true' or `on'.
336
337Example:
338
699238d9 339 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 340
0d0c76b8
EZ
341** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
342more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
343now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
344
42088c12 345** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 346display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
347shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
348be customized.
c60ea02e 349
424d8b44 350+++
31047e0d
DL
351** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
352
424d8b44 353+++
b02786f9
GM
354** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
355all frames except the selected one.
356
3261c1d8
DL
357** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
358to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
359
ffe36136 360** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
361the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
362MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
363displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
364
0292b49f 365+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
366** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
367MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 368
559cee90
DL
369** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
370read mail from the menu etc.
371
480b5773 372+++
271b4185
GM
373** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
374a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
375
0daee095
GM
376** Changes in Texinfo mode.
377
a5e350c9 378*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
379macros
380
381 Key binding Macro
382 -------------------------
383 C-c C-c C-s @strong
384 C-c C-c C-e @emph
a5e350c9 385 C-c C-c u @url
0daee095 386 C-c C-c q @quotation
a5e350c9
SM
387 C-c C-c m @email
388 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
389 M-RET @item
390
391*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 392
559cee90
DL
393** Changes in Outline mode.
394
395There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
396`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
397the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
398
327652be 399** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 400
c0a8c108
EZ
401+++
402*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
403with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
404are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
405Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
406buffers to kill, as before.
407
408Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 409i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
410this way.
411
956777b3
GM
412** Changes to Show Paren mode.
413
414*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
415The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
416use. Default is 1000.
417
f6989277 418+++
404fa7d6
DL
419** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
420groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
421
424d8b44
DL
422+++
423** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
424M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
425M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
426buffers.
8964fec7 427
424d8b44 428+++
39783d73
WP
429** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
430under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
431.emacs file.
432
433The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
434determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
435
d35fce81
GM
436** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
437abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
438`directory-abbrev-alist'.
439
a933dad1
DL
440** Faces and frame parameters.
441
442There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
443Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
444`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
445`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
446sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
447for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
448parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
449
450Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
451`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 452`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
453`default' face and vice versa.
454
d80061fa 455+++
f77a4a8a
GM
456** New face `menu'.
457
458The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
459Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
460attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
461
424d8b44 462+++
a933dad1
DL
463** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
464
465The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
466colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
467correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
468the screen gamma of a frame's display.
469
470PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
471in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
472color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
473
474The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
475`ScreenGamma'.
476
477** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
478
479The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
480Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
481oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
482of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
483the text.
484
485** Emacs has a new face implementation.
486
487The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
488font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
489height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
490These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
491specify a font.
492
493Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
494These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
495under Lisp changes, below.
496
497** New default font is Courier 12pt.
498
424d8b44
DL
499+++
500** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
501of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
502otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
503
504** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
505truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
506foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
507customizing face `fringe'.
508
509** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
510can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
511
512** LessTif support.
513
424d8b44
DL
514Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
515You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
516
517** Toolkit scroll bars.
518
519Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
520LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
521configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
522bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
523bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
524Emacs.
525
526When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
527Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
528Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
529Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
530define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
531`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
532
533Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
534a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
535directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
536different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
537system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
538add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
539
540The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
541`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
542This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
543image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
544Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
545
546** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
547
548When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
549widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
550Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
551
424d8b44 552+++
a933dad1
DL
553** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
554
555When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
556whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
557defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
558highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
559displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
560whitespace.
561
6e612d4d 562+++
a933dad1
DL
563** Busy-cursor.
564
565Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
566display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
567
424d8b44 568+++
a933dad1
DL
569** Blinking cursor
570
571M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
572terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
573and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
574the group `cursor'.
575
8ac08dea 576+++
a933dad1
DL
577** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
578
579This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
580generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
581See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
582details.
583
584Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
585have to do anything to activate it.
586
587** Tabs and variable-width text.
588
589Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
590defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
591independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
592Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
593
594** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
595
424d8b44 596+++
a933dad1
DL
597*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
598
599 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
600
79dd1637
RS
601The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
602LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 603
79dd1637
RS
604*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
605LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 606
34d90e29 607+++
a933dad1
DL
608** Hscrolling in C code.
609
cc181e95
GM
610Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
611`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
612customized.
a933dad1 613
8ac08dea 614+++
a933dad1
DL
615** Tool bar support.
616
617Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
618of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
619changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
8628686a
DL
620displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
621need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
622assignments).
a933dad1 623
424d8b44 624+++
a933dad1
DL
625** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
626
627Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
628mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
629line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
630about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
631in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
632
633Currently, the following actions have been defined:
634
635- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
636buffers.
637
638- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
639M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
640
641- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
642
424d8b44
DL
643- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
644`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
645
646- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
647
648** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
649
650When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 651from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
652non-nil.
653
654** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
655
656Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
657Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
658the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
659italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
660Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
661attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
662on terminals.
a933dad1 663
54a9404d
EZ
664The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
665supported on character terminals.
666
a933dad1
DL
667** Sound support
668
2f516940 669Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 670driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 671supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 672
424d8b44 673+++
a933dad1
DL
674** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
675the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
676forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
677value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
678users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
679even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
680
681The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
682
0e18b431 683+++
a933dad1
DL
684** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
685
686As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
687drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
688`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
689
fdd8bb68 690+++
a933dad1
DL
691** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
692bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
693
694This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
695`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
696variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
697
c5d00c64 698+++
a933dad1
DL
699** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
700
701When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
702value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
703number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 704fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
705
706When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
707value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
708number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 709fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
710
711** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
712notably at the end of lines.
713
714All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
715spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
716
424d8b44 717+++
eee54b0e
DL
718There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
719
a933dad1
DL
720** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
721query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
722after each match to get the replacement text.
723
00782214 724+++
d5483ab1
GM
725** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
726you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 727
424d8b44 728** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
729you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
730lisp-complete-symbol.
731
7af69644 732+++
a933dad1
DL
733** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
734
163ea954 735If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
736longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
737is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
738minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
739
740- User option: max-mini-window-height
741
742Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
743fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 744specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
745
746Default is 0.25.
747
a299a6f0
GM
748- User option: resize-mini-windows
749
750How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
751resize ot fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
752grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
753again.
754
755Default is `grow-only'.
756
2f72fd2f
GM
757** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
758
0d43b60d
GM
759** Changes to hideshow.el
760
761Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
762selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
763conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
764
765*** Generalized block selection and traversal
766
767A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
768(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
769which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
770`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
771point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
772(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
773
774If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
775i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
776backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
777the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
778
779*** Isearch support for updating mode line
780
781During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
782blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
783line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
784portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
785is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
786
787To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
788something like this in your .emacs.
789
790 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
791 (lambda ()
792 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
793
327652be
TTN
794*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
795
796Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
797header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
798`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
799moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
800block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
801behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
802useful.
803
804You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
805function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
806of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
807code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
808appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
809
810(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
811 (hs-hide-level 1)
812 (forward-sexp 1))
813(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
814
815The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
816emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
817only for code blocks.
818
819*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
820
821Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
822parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
823display for implementation.
824
825*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
826
827The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
828LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
829which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
830new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
831
832 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
833 hs-show-block C-c C-s
834 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
835 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
836 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
837 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
838 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
839
840These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
841
559cee90
DL
842** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
843
424d8b44 844+++
1b24b888
GM
845*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
846an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
847log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
848
424d8b44 849+++
1b24b888
GM
850**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
851current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
852
853+++
1b24b888
GM
854*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
855in a log file.
eb2aac9d 856
502004be 857+++
1b24b888
GM
858*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
859entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 860
502004be 861+++
1b24b888 862*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
863version number is performed based on regular expressions from
864`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
865Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 866
2c63c979 867*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 868
79c78e77
GM
869** Changes to cmuscheme
870
871*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
872`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
873
3476b54a
GM
874** Changes in Font Lock
875
876*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 877font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 878
2c63c979
SM
879*** multiline patterns are now supported.
880
a5e350c9
SM
881*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
882the face used for each string/comment.
883
b3b98592
GM
884** Comint (subshell) changes
885
988cded7
MB
886These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
887include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
888
889*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
890to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
891parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
892user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
893this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
894respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
895feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
896`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
897
898*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
899and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
900
988cded7 901*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
902buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
903buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
904
905The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
906M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
907the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
908
988cded7
MB
909*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
910and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
911see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 912
988cded7 913*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
914saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
915argument, it appends to the file.
916
988cded7 917*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
918(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
919compatibility.
920
0e40b809
EL
921*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
922ring (history).
d648cc45 923
e26cec67
GM
924** Changes to Rmail mode
925
c0510d27
GM
926*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
927set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
928receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
929recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
930`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
931as correspondent.
932
933Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
934mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 935regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 936
3b55acc9
GM
937*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
938to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
939Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
940with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
941for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
942
6a1950ec
GM
943*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
944like `j'.
945
5bb6f079
RS
946*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
947specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 948digest message.
e26cec67 949
993d8b7d
DL
950*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
951in which folder to put messages automatically.
952
400a1ed0
GM
953** Changes to TeX mode
954
a5e350c9 955*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
956`latex-mode'.
957
a5e350c9
SM
958*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
959
960*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
961
962*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
963
a933dad1
DL
964** Changes to RefTeX mode
965
966*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
967 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
968 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
969 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
970 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
971 can be edited from that buffer.
972
973*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
974 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
975 `A' to use all marked entries).
976
977*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
978 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
979
980*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
981 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
982 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
983 been cited.
984
38de9631
GM
985** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
986The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
987semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
988in column 1 are always made leaves.
989
a933dad1
DL
990** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
991has the following new features:
992
993*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
994may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
995to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
996time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
997
998*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
999feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1000file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1001compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1002pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1003defaults to 1.
1004
5d94f558 1005** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1006file names.
1007
424d8b44 1008+++
a933dad1
DL
1009** Tooltips.
1010
1011Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
1012mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
1013can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
1014
1015Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1016variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1017the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1018tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1019
424d8b44 1020+++
a933dad1
DL
1021** Customize changes
1022
1023*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1024`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1025cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1026
1027*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1028Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1029default).
1030
0ae51efb
GM
1031*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1032between custom options. Example:
1033
1034 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1035 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1036 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1037 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1038 :group 'mule
1039 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1040 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1041
1042This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1043current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1044first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1045
a933dad1
DL
1046** New features in evaluation commands
1047
5e03eb84 1048*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1049modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1050print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1051customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1052eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1053
5e03eb84
GM
1054*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1055code when called with a prefix argument.
1056
ead53494
GM
1057** Ispell changes
1058
37d8a691 1059+++
bbe15990
EZ
1060*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1061transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1062spell-checks the current buffer.
1063
37d8a691 1064+++
385ff9e3
GM
1065*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1066added.
1067
1068*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1069correction is made and re-checked.
1070
74ec6045 1071*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1072
1073*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1074cases.
1075
1076*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1077on syntax errors.
1078
1079*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1080end of the buffer.
1081
a933dad1
DL
1082** Dired changes
1083
1084*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1085command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1086is, delete only empty directories.
1087
1088*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1089command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1090copy directories recursively.
1091
f6737cde
GM
1092*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1093in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1094the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1095
2f72fd2f
GM
1096*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1097replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1098directory.
1099
7381ae05
MB
1100*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1101a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1102This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1103will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1104accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1105
e024b101
GM
1106*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1107from ls switches.
1108
60b392a7
MB
1109*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1110of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1111which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1112source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1113
a933dad1
DL
1114** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1115use the -f option when sending mail.
1116
b1c609b1
GM
1117** CC mode changes.
1118
1119Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1120current user setups (although it's believed that these
1121incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1122However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1123back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1124compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1125release.
1126
7972fcfc
GM
1127*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1128This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1129of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1130non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1131want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1132have to bother.
1133
1134Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1135situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1136and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1137If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1138the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1139by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1140
b1c609b1
GM
1141*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1142When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1143variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1144take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1145is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1146settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1147possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1148Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1149
1150By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1151special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1152the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1153of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1154above.
1155
1156Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1157when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1158function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1159call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1160then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1161values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1162only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1163function documentation for more info.
1164
1165The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1166especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1167with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1168intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1169such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1170is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1171configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1172global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1173
1174(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1175
1176**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1177This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1178
1179This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1180variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1181completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1182the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1183empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1184style system.
1185
1186**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1187In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1188c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1189as far as possible.
1190
1191*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1192CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1193surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1194chapter about this in the manual.
1195
1196**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1197The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1198recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1199primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1200adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1201
1202**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1203This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1204c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1205
1206**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1207This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1208
1209It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1210Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1211A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1212inside CC Mode.
1213
1214Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1215causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1216the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1217available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1218cc-mode/).
1219
1220**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1221The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1222specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1223literals.
1224
1225**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1226It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1227prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1228you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1229this function.
1230
1231*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1232It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1233to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1234struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1235Thanks to Eric Eide.
1236
1237*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1238It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1239opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1240
1241**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1242
1243*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1244See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1245better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1246and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1247
1248*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1249previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1250the column specified by comment-column.
1251
1252*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1253In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1254is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1255prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1256contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1257don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1258
1259*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1260instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1261arguments.
1262
1263*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1264
1265*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1266c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1267c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1268variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1269Provan).
1270
1271*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1272
c407c570
GM
1273** Makefile mode changes
1274
1275*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1276
5d94f558 1277*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1278Fontlock mode is active.
1279
87be76f6
GM
1280** Isearch changes
1281
3353ef5a
GM
1282*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1283so that searches can be resumed.
1284
1285*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1286respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1287that started the search.
1288
87be76f6 1289*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1290selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1291
c8a8458a 1292+++
87be76f6
GM
1293*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1294
d35fce81 1295Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1296`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1297search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1298before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1299highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1300`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1301
1302The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1303will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1304Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1305using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1306usual snappy response.
1307
1308If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1309matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1310set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1311isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1312
21bc6203 1313+++
35384f06
GM
1314** Changes in sort.el
1315
1316The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1317as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1318new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1319numeric base.
87be76f6 1320
d7b511c4
GM
1321** Changes to Ange-ftp
1322
424d8b44 1323+++
d7b511c4 1324*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1325names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1326sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1327
d7b511c4
GM
1328*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1329ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1330
9d453139
SS
1331*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1332output ^M at the end of lines.
1333
4b9347b3
GM
1334** Shell script mode changes.
1335
1336Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1337derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1338sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1339
79214ddf
FP
1340** Etags changes.
1341
1342*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1343
aca0be23 1344*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1345possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1346{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1347This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1348a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1349
79214ddf
FP
1350*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1351declarations when given the --declarations option.
1352
1353*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1354"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1355
1356*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1357types.
1358
de370c4c 1359*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1360
1361*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1362
1363*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1364are now tagged.
1365
1366*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1367variables are tagged.
1368
1369*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1370
8dc78b52
FP
1371*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1372for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1373
c8d94f86 1374+++
f6737cde
GM
1375** Changes in etags.el
1376
3f6e4b8b
GM
1377*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1378tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1379is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1380
f6737cde
GM
1381*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1382the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1383
1384If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1385FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1386TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1387obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1388
1389TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1390
1391FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1392List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1393
1394A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1395
1396 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1397 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1398 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1399
1400*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1401of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1402
1403*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1404names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1405
424d8b44 1406+++
fbc164de
PE
1407** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1408and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1409LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1410
c3eb1f10 1411+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1412** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1413Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14148859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1415GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14168859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1417releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1418(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1419
424d8b44 1420+++
163ea954 1421** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1422remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1423appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1424
1425** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1426
424d8b44 1427+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1428** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1429
6ab8d72d 1430+++
f6499c03 1431** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1432containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1433expression from that list, are not checked.
1434
5d94f558
SS
1435** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1436When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1437and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1438the buffer, just like for the local files.
1439
dc28878c
GM
1440** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1441
df8a9f78 1442+++
95931eb1
GM
1443** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1444displays local abbrevs, only.
1445
54baed30
GM
1446** VC Changes
1447
1448VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1449easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1450Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1451to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1452changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1453`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1454version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1455each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1456file is registered in that backend.
1457
1458When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1459backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1460directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1461master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1462the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1463As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1464
1465The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1466still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1467RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1468vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1469where it doesn't make sense.)
1470
1471The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1472obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1473`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1474
1475*** General Changes
1476
1477The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1478checks are always done now.
1479
327652be 1480VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1481operations.
1482
c286608e
SM
1483`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1484`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1485`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1486
22933be8
AS
1487The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1488first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1489current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1490the working file (``merge news'').
1491
1492The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1493(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1494downwards.
1495
1496*** Multiple Backends
1497
1498VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1499useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1500repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1501commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1502local RCS archives.
1503
1504To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1505should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1506backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1507`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1508
1509If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1510it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1511Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1512by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1513backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1514VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1515happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1516from the more remote backend.
1517
1518If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1519another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1520any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1521pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1522
1523After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1524changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1525local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1526buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1527
54baed30
GM
1528*** Changes for CVS
1529
1530There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1531default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1532remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1533by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1534regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1535that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1536queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1537
22933be8
AS
1538If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1539repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1540revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1541any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1542backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1543number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1544(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1545of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1546the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
1547automatically after commit.
1548
54baed30
GM
1549If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1550repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1551If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1552commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1553current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1554entire directory tree.
1555
1556The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1557"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1558is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1559"watched" by other developers.)
1560
22933be8
AS
1561The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1562(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1563an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1564starting at the given directory.
1565
54baed30
GM
1566*** Lisp Changes in VC
1567
1568VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1569add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1570library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1571then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1572a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1573provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1574of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1575you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1576`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1577
a933dad1
DL
1578** New modes and packages
1579
4473cdd9
JW
1580+++
1581*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1582implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1583It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1584functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1585history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1586will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1587the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1588rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1589all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1590
ff332647 1591+++
90cbf47e
GM
1592*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1593intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1594typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1595on certain projects.
1596
894ca69e 1597+++
90cbf47e 1598*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1599regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1600
d96d6bb0 1601 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1602
1603will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1604face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1605typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1606Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1607appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1608current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1609corresponding file is read.
1610
424d8b44 1611+++
d96d6bb0 1612*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1613Emacs is idle.
1614
31fc5d15
GM
1615*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1616parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1617
5cb6a58e
SM
1618*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1619package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1620be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1621
424d8b44 1622+++
578979ee
GM
1623*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1624facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1625separate Texinfo file.
1626
424d8b44
DL
1627+++
1628*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1629by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1630provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1631`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1632enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1633
424d8b44 1634+++
6abca616
EZ
1635*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1636without invoking external programs.
1637
1638The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1639and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1640`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1641is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1642Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1643
1644The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1645page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1646
719e2c6e 1647+++
5e5dff44
GM
1648*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1649authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1650
1651The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1652the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1653the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1654Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1655even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1656single step.
1657
1658On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1659matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1660probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1661contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1662
424d8b44 1663+++
f7136ee8
GM
1664*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1665unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1666actually modifying content of a buffer.
1667
bbd9b566
GM
1668*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1669PostScript.
1670
1671Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1672
1673The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1674
1675 ; comment (until end of line)
1676 A non-terminal
1677 "C" terminal
1678 ?C? special
1679 $A default non-terminal
1680 $"C" default terminal
1681 $?C? default special
1682 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1683 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1684 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1685 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1686 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1687 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1688 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1689 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1690 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1691 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1692 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1693 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1694 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1695 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1696 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1697
1698Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1699
99453a38
GM
1700*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1701align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1702determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1703example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1704equal signs of assignments.
1705
424d8b44 1706+++
559cee90
DL
1707*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1708paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1709
424d8b44 1710+++
6448a6b3
GM
1711*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1712list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1713buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1714customize the package.
1715
6344985d
GM
1716*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1717
249652b1
GM
1718*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1719replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1720is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1721and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1722not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1723which answers different needs.
1724
424d8b44 1725+++
3476b54a
GM
1726*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1727suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1728expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1729course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1730reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1731to be enabled.
1732
424d8b44 1733+++
8964fec7
SM
1734*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1735containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1736
424d8b44 1737+++
a933dad1
DL
1738*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1739
424d8b44 1740+++
a933dad1
DL
1741*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1742
1743*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1744
8901d1ac
GM
1745Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1746`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1747disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1748`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1749displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1750and background colors.
1751
a933dad1
DL
1752*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1753Pascal) language.
1754
f6499c03 1755+++
a933dad1
DL
1756*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1757the text at point.
1758
1759*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1760
424d8b44 1761+++
8d54eb69
DL
1762*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1763
a933dad1
DL
1764*** whitespace.el ???
1765
ebcfda83
GM
1766*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1767files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1768(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1769interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1770often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1771uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1772codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1773
1774*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1775
1776Here is an example of columns:
1777
1778horse apple bus
1779dog pineapple car EXTRA
1780porcupine strawberry airplane
1781
1782Doing the following settings:
1783
1784 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1785 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1786 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1787 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1788
1789
1790Selecting the lines above and typing:
1791
1792 M-x delimit-columns-region
1793
1794It results:
1795
1796[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1797[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1798[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1799
1800delim-col has the following options:
1801
1802 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1803 before all columns.
1804
1805 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1806 between each column.
1807
1808 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1809 after all columns.
1810
1811 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1812 each column.
1813
1814delim-col has the following commands:
1815
1816 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1817 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1818
424d8b44 1819+++
f507826c 1820*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1821were operated on recently.
1822
1823M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1824
31fc5d15
GM
1825M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1826recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1827
31fc5d15
GM
1828M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1829filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1830file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1831
31fc5d15
GM
1832- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1833- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1834- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1835
31fc5d15
GM
1836The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1837dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1838
8062f458
DL
1839*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1840text.
1841
424d8b44 1842+++
36e24b82 1843*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1844of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1845specific to Message mode.
1846
424d8b44 1847+++
36e24b82
DL
1848*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1849viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1850with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1851
424d8b44 1852+++
aaa659ef
DL
1853*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1854interface to access directory servers using different directory
1855protocols. It has a separate manual.
1856
eee54b0e
DL
1857*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1858for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1859
424d8b44 1860+++
612839b6
GM
1861*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1862
5d94f558 1863*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1864minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1865
399da7e3
DL
1866*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1867with the diary features.
1868
6e417ca5
DL
1869*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1870numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1871
4a27bdfb
GM
1872*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1873Fill mode.
1874
60dd7e0e
DL
1875*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1876Gnus facilities.
1877
dace60cf
JW
1878*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1879facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1880difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1881they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1882
965bc065
DL
1883+++
1884** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1885paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1886
1887+++
1888** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1889to be visited as images.
1890
a933dad1
DL
1891** Withdrawn packages
1892
1893*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1894functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1895
3261c1d8
DL
1896*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1897
1898*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1899
1900\f
1901* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1902(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1903
52d89894
GM
1904+++
1905** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
1906alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
1907
4301cf66
DL
1908** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
1909currently using the `md5sum' program.
1910
6bc92b2e
GM
1911** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
1912deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
1913being deleted.
1914
39e776cd
SM
1915** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
1916
a18a342d 1917+++
1396138a 1918** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
1919If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
1920skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
1921with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
1922C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
1923charset.
1924
4fbdfdcf
MB
1925+++
1926** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1927the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1928message.
1929
6a0b0752
MB
1930** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1931expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1932
47e351a3
GM
1933** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1934with the more general `:mask' property.
1935
ba9eeda1
GM
1936** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1937
a2bd77b8
GM
1938** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1939backslash.
1940
424d8b44
DL
1941+++
1942** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1943is running in batch mode. For example,
1944
1945 (message "%s" (read t))
1946
1947will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1948to standard output.
1949
1950+++
1951** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1952`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1953
ead53494
GM
1954** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1955will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1956frame or window.
1957
f6499c03 1958+++
27848c01
GM
1959** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1960were added
1961
1962- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1963
1964Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1965a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1966
1967- Function: remq ELT LIST
1968
1969Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1970comparison is done with `eq'.
1971
1972** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1973
b548072f
GM
1974** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1975has been changed.
1976
424d8b44 1977+++
07b14857
KH
1978** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1979without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1980convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1981
9662da0b
GM
1982** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1983or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1984
7fce7efb
DL
1985** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1986function was declared obsolete.
1987
5d94f558 1988** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1989retained as an alias).
1990
f98d3086
SM
1991** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1992It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1993is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1994
87efd256
GM
1995** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1996
1997- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1998
1999Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
2000MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
2001
67c9a1d2
GM
2002** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2003
2004- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2005
2006Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2007
2008This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2009calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2010argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2011value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2012returned.
2013
2014Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2015if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2016it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2017minibuffer even if it is active.
2018
2019Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2020counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2021too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2022and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2023`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2024entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2025
2026ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2027ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2028ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2029ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2030ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2031If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2032Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2033
ead53494
GM
2034** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2035event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2036argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2037
25fa6deb
GM
2038** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2039call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2040message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2041Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2042
5d94f558 2043** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2044meaning no limit.
2045
5d94f558 2046** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2047coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2048DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2049
80c05bd3 2050** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
2051of a primitive.
2052
c286608e
SM
2053** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2054
80c05bd3
DL
2055** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2056buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2057This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2058than replacing the local map.
2059
4bc7a543
DL
2060** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2061after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2062
2063** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2064
f6499c03 2065+++
c286608e
SM
2066** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2067as promised long ago.
f0298744 2068
5d94f558 2069** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2070\f
2071* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2072
2073Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2074--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2075When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2076so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2077
85c75536
MB
2078*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2079buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2080the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2081restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2082
0b8a3a6d
DL
2083*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2084`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2085when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2086multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2087
2088*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2089`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2090contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2091
2092*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2093changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2094[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2095regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2096the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2097extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2098bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2099eight-bit-graphic.
2100
2101** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2102
2103A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2104a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2105character set as previously.
2106
2107*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2108They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2109modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2110
2111CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2112characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2113range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2114case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2115
2116FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2117name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2118
2119*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2120registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2121"fontset-default".
2122
2123*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2124argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2125
2126** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2127composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2128buffers and strings.
2129
2130*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2131character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2132code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2133have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2134composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2135composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2136The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2137also been deleted.
2138
2139*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2140specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2141`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2142
2143*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2144MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2145composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2146may differ between buffer and string text.
2147
2148*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2149COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2150
2151*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2152directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2153Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2154`composition' from STRING.
2155
2156*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2157a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2158
2159*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2160obsolete.
2161
965bc065 2162** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2163`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2164for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2165U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2166
2167** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2168`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2169X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2170
2171+++
2172** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2173are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 21740xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2175
399da7e3 2176+++
f0124b4a
DL
2177** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2178that offset in the file before writing.
2179
f98d3086
SM
2180** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2181compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2182
612839b6
GM
2183** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2184`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2185from which the command was issued.
2186
2187** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2188`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2189`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2190additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2191operate on.
2192
271b4185
GM
2193** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2194to `window-buffer-height'.
2195
2196- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2197
2198Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2199The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2200lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2201
2202Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2203respectively.
2204
2205If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2206COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2207
2208The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2209obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2210on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2211
2212Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2213buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2214possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2215is currently displayed in some window.
2216
3c30cb6e
DL
2217** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2218argument function's results.
2219
62f20204
GM
2220** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2221signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2222
c0510d27 2223** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2224header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2225
2226** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2227ignores differences in case and text representation.
2228
2229** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2230cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2231as follows:
2232
2233 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2234 nil don't display a cursor
2235 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2236 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2237 others display a box cursor.
2238
9a0dd3dc
GM
2239** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2240an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2241defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2242set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2243
d7b511c4 2244** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2245specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2246the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2247text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2248
2249Example:
2250
2251 (string-to-syntax "()")
2252 => (4 . 41)
2253
1fa28578
GM
2254** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2255other than 10.
2256
2257*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2258INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2259
5d94f558 2260 #b1111
1fa28578 2261 => 15
5d94f558 2262 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2263 => -15
2264
2265*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2266
5d94f558 2267 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2268 => 438
2269
2270*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2271
5d94f558 2272 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2273 => 48815
2274
2275*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2276
5d94f558 2277 #2R-111
1fa28578 2278 => -7
5d94f558 2279 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2280 => 267
2281
3d4ff2dd 2282** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2283the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2284and isn't a string.
2285
3d4ff2dd
GM
2286** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2287a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2288value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2289not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2290
16ce590d
DL
2291+++
2292** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2293
73825616 2294** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2295for a regexp in a string.
2296
2297** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2298`mouse-position-function'.
2299
723e779c
GM
2300** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2301that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2302
d1e103b2
GM
2303** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2304Keywords are now always considered constants.
2305
31047e0d
DL
2306+++
2307** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2308returns it.
2309
7a85e4df
GM
2310** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2311returned by function `recent-keys'.
2312
02b14400
RS
2313+++
2314** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2315can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2316Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2317etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2318mode.
404fa7d6 2319
02b14400 2320+++
8964fec7
SM
2321** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2322and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2323
02b14400
RS
2324+++
2325** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2326has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2327function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2328returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2329been performed."
2330
2331When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2332and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2333hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2334then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2335
02b14400 2336+++
81da8b32
GM
2337** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2338In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2339and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2340
02b14400 2341+++
9e207b90
GM
2342** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2343with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2344specified table.
2345
2346 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2347
2348Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2349TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2350saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2351what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2352
02b14400 2353+++
d7f89643 2354** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2355Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2356
02b14400 2357+++
dde9e75a
GM
2358** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2359removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2360
02b14400 2361+++
9da30515
GM
2362** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2363instead of being optional.
2364
02b14400 2365+++
d20679eb
GM
2366** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2367modify read-only text.
2368
02b14400 2369+++
fbc164de
PE
2370** New functions and variables for locales.
2371
2372The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2373decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2374time functions like strftime. The new variables
2375`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2376locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2377
2378The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2379environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2380the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2381environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2382not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2383`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2384`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2385
02b14400 2386+++
863476d1
SM
2387** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2388To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2389modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2390start sequences.
2391
02b14400 2392+++
ef6d912c
GM
2393** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2394because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2395
02b14400 2396+++
a933dad1
DL
2397** New function `propertize'
2398
2399The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2400strings with text properties.
2401
2402- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2403
2404Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2405by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2406PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2407specified value of that property. Example:
2408
2409 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2410
2411+++
2412** push and pop macros.
2413
02b14400
RS
2414Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2415are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2416as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2417
2418(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2419(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2420 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2421
02b14400
RS
2422** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2423
6c7fd5aa
RS
2424Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2425are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2426
2427(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2428 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2429 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2430 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2431
2432(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2433 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2434 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2435 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2436
a933dad1
DL
2437+++
2438** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2439as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2440
2441[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2442[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2443[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2444[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2445[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2446 space, and DEL.
2447[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2448 and DEL.
2449[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2450 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2451 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2452[:alpha:] matches letters.
2453 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2454 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2455[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2456[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2457[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2458[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2459 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2460 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2461[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2462[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2463[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2464
2465+++
2466** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2467
2468The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2469
2470- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2471
2472The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2473are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2474
2475:test TEST
2476
2477TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2478Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2479it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2480
2481:size SIZE
2482
2483SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2484many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2485
2486:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2487
2488REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2489full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2490size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
24911.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2492old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2493
2494:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2495
2496THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2497hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2498(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2499
2500:weakness WEAK
2501
b548072f
GM
2502WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2503`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2504`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2505collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2506outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2507
2508- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2509
2510Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2511
2512- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2513
2514Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2515
2516- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2517
2518Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2519values are shared.
2520
2521- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2522
2523Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2524
2525- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2526
2527Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2528
2529- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2530
2531Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2532
2533- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2534
2535Returns the size of TABLE.
2536
d96d6bb0 2537- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2538
2539Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2540
2541- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2542
2543Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2544
2545- Function: clrhash TABLE
2546
2547Clear TABLE.
2548
2549- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2550
2551Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2552not found.
2553
79214ddf 2554- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2555
2556Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2557another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2558
2559- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2560
2561Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2562
2563- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2564
2565Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2566arguments KEY and VALUE.
2567
2568- Function: sxhash OBJ
2569
2570Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2571
2572- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2573
2574Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2575a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2576comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2577and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2578of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2579
2580TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2581
2582HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2583code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2584integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2585
2586Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2587be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2588
2589 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2590 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2591
2592 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2593 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2594
79214ddf 2595 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2596 'case-fold-string-hash))
2597
2598 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2599
2600+++
2601** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2602
2603It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2604circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2605a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2606
2607+++
2608** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2609
2610If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2611#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2612
a933dad1
DL
2613+++
2614** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2615t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2616specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2617is too short to reach that column.
2618
2619+++
2620** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2621now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2622after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2623two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2624
2625If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2626perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2627and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2628
2629+++
2630** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2631to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2632
2633+++
2634** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2635calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2636
2637+++
2638** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2639directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2640small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2641small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2642temporary-file-directory instead.
2643
2644+++
2645** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2646the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2647`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2648hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2649
2650+++
2651** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2652elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2653
2654+++
2655** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2656
2657make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2658creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2659ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2660
2661+++
2662** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2663
2664The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2665on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2666is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2667never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2668ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2669overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2670
2671If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2672that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2673to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2674The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2675
2676+++
2677** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2678
2679Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2680If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2681ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2682result string.
2683
2684Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2685string where arguments appear in the result string.
2686
2687Example:
2688
2689 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2690 (s2 "world"))
2691 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2692 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2693 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2694
2695results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2696
2697+++
2698** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2699
2700Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2701The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2702argument in it.
2703
2704 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2705 (arg "world"))
2706 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2707 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2708 (message msg arg))
2709
2710+++
2711** Sound support
2712
2713Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2714(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2715
2716Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2717(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2718to enable sound support.
2719
2720Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2721list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2722when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2723functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2724sound to play, before playing the sound.
2725
2726The following sound properties are supported:
2727
2728- `:file FILE'
2729
2730FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2731searched relative to `data-directory'.
2732
6fb40beb
GM
2733- `:data DATA'
2734
2735DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2736may be present, but not both.
2737
a933dad1
DL
2738- `:volume VOLUME'
2739
2740VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
27410..1. This property is optional.
2742
2743Other properties are ignored.
2744
2745** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2746
2747** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2748a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2749
2750** Changes to garbage collection
2751
2752*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2753of live and free strings.
2754
2755*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2756strings that have been consed so far.
2757
a933dad1 2758\f
04545643
GM
2759* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2760Lisp Manual
2761
f7eb32aa 2762+++
a299a6f0
GM
2763** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2764mini-windows.
2765
2766** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2767If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2768considered visible.
2769
a299a6f0 2770** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2771
9a8d84ca
DL
2772+++
2773** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2774
2775** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2776image.
2777
2778- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2779
2780Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2781
2782SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2783measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2784character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2785font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2786FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2787
ebb8f116
GM
2788** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2789has a mask bitmap.
2790
2791- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2792
2793Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2794FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2795or omitted means use the selected frame.
2796
f6499c03 2797+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2798** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2799satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2800
2801+++
2802** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2803optional.
2804
f6499c03
DL
2805+++
2806** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2807below).
04545643
GM
2808
2809\f
a933dad1
DL
2810* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2811
2812Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2813--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2814When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2815so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2816
f6d3257b
GM
2817** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2818to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2819
2820Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2821text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2822is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2823your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2824laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2825just display it black instead.
2826
2827This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2828a line like
2829
2830 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2831
2832in your `.emacs'.
2833
a933dad1
DL
2834** New face implementation.
2835
2836Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2837font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2838
2839+++
2840*** New faces.
2841
2842Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2843
2844 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2845
a933dad1
DL
2846 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2847 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2848
a933dad1 2849 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2850
a933dad1 2851 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2852
a933dad1 2853 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2854
a933dad1 2855 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2856
a933dad1
DL
2857 7. Background color.
2858
2859 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2860
2861 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2862
2863 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2864
2865 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2866
2867 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2868 color.
2869
2870 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2871 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2872
2873Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2874same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2875frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2876faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2877with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2878attributes mentioned above.
2879
2880There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2881definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2882created frames.
79214ddf 2883
a933dad1
DL
2884A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2885have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2886`fully-specified'.
2887
2888+++
2889*** Face merging.
2890
2891The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2892combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2893aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2894properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2895that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2896results in a fully-specified face.
2897
2898+++
2899*** Face realization.
2900
2901After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2902merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2903realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2904available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2905face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2906cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2907
2908Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2909character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2910for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2911charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2912
2913Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2914specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2915being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2916the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2917statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2918
2919In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2920`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
29210x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2922the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2923initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2924Emacs.
2925
2926Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2927`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2928registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2929with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2930
a7c13351 2931+++
a933dad1
DL
2932**** Clearing face caches.
2933
2934The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2935on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2936unused fonts.
2937
2938+++
2939*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2940
a933dad1
DL
2941Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2942given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2943for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2944
2945If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2946pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2947family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2948property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2949an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2950
2951Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2952against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2953match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2954
2955Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2956
2957The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2958attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2959face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2960names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2961that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2962width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2963to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2964
52d89894
GM
2965Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
2966alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
2967doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
2968specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
2969
2970+++
2971**** Scalable fonts
2972
2973Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2974since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2975servers.
2976
2977To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2978`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2979scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2980Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2981scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2982that list. Example:
2983
2984 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2985
2986allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2987
2988+++
2989*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2990
2991- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2992
2993Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2994is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2995string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2996
2997If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2998the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2999FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3000POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3001SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3002These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3003if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3004REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3005the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3006of the face font sort order.
3007
79214ddf 3008- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3009
3010Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3011omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3012(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3013non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3014
3015- Variable: font-list-limit
3016
3017Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3018won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3019matching font. The default is currently 100.
3020
3021+++
3022*** Setting face attributes.
3023
3024For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3025with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3026implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3027`face-attribute'.
3028
3029Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3030symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3031
3032The following attributes are recognized:
3033
3034`:family'
3035
3036VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3037or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3038and `?' are allowed.
3039
3040`:width'
3041
3042VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3043It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3044`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3045`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3046
3047`:height'
3048
787345ff
MB
3049VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3050in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3051scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3052height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3053
3054`:weight'
3055
3056VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3057symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3058`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3059
3060`:slant'
3061
3062VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3063symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3064`reverse-oblique'.
3065
3066`:foreground', `:background'
3067
3068VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3069
3070`:underline'
3071
3072VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3073VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3074a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3075don't underline.
3076
3077`:overline'
3078
3079VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3080VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3081string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3082overline.
3083
3084`:strike-through'
3085
3086VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3087striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3088face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3089is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3090
3091`:box'
3092
3093VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3094around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3095VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3096of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3097and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3098VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3099:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3100the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3101specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3102defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3103the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3104color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3105should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3106like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3107that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3108the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3109box.
3110
3111`:inverse-video'
3112
3113VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3114inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3115
3116`:stipple'
3117
3118If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3119The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3120searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3121HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3122is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3123explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3124
3125For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3126and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3127
3128`:font'
3129
3130Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3131XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3132is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3133versions of Emacs.
3134
3135For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3136be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3137must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3138
3139Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3140`defface'.
3141
787345ff
MB
3142`:inherit'
3143
3144VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3145of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3146like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3147
a933dad1
DL
3148*** Face attributes and X resources
3149
3150The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3151from X resources:
3152
3153 Face attribute X resource class
3154-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3155 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3156 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3157 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3158 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3159 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3160 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3161 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3162 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3163 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3164 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3165 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3166 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3167 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3168 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3169 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3170 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3171 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3172 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3173 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3174
3175+++
3176*** Text property `face'.
3177
3178The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3179specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3180specification can be
3181
31821. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3183
31842. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3185 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3186 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3187 for face attribute names.
3188
31893. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3190 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3191 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3192
3193+++
3194** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3195
acf3ecb7
EZ
3196The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3197on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3198the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3199default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3200`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3201used to clear the mapping table.
3202
acf3ecb7
EZ
3203** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3204
3205The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3206and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3207type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3208color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3209display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3210old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3211`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3212compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3213should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3214modify their color-related behavior.
3215
3216The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3217any frame type.
3218
8a5719f0
EZ
3219** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3220
3221The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3222`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3223`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3224`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3225`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3226`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3227display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3228the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3229platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3230
a933dad1
DL
3231+++
3232** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3233
463cac2d 3234This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3235
3236The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3237end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3238Otherwise, it returns zero.
3239
463cac2d
GM
3240** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3241
3242There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3243buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3244property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3245
9a9dfda8 3246Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3247forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3248to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3249not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3250commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3251boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3252`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3253functions.
463cac2d
GM
3254
3255Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3256a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3257editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3258
9a9dfda8
GM
3259The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3260
59927f88 3261- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3262
3263Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3264
9a9dfda8
GM
3265A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3266If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3267constrained position if that is is different.
3268
3269If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3270positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3271ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3272constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3273as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3274is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3275fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3276the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3277also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3278
3279If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3280NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3281unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3282C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3283only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3284
59927f88
MB
3285If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3286a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3287
3288Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3289
3290- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3291
59927f88 3292Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3293A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3294If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3295
3296- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3297
3298Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3299A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3300If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3301If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3302field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3303
3304- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3305
3306Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3307A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3308If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3309If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3310then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3311
3312- Function: field-string &optional POS
3313
3314Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3315A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3316If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3317
3318- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3319
3320Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3321A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3322If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3323
a933dad1
DL
3324+++
3325** Image support.
3326
3327Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3328strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3329(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3330replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3331
3332If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3333`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3334AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3335window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3336area.
3337
3338IMAGE is an image specification.
3339
3340*** Image specifications
3341
3342Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3343is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3344specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3345symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3346described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3347
3348The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3349
3350`:ascent ASCENT'
3351
576da55d
GM
3352ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3353If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3354to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3355
3356If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3357image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3358
5d94f558 3359If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3360centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3361of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3362overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3363
3364`:margin MARGIN'
3365
79214ddf 3366MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3367margin around the image. Default is 0.
3368
3369`:relief RELIEF'
3370
3371RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3372around an image.
3373
3374`:algorithm ALGO'
3375
47e351a3
GM
3376Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3377
3378ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3379edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3380
3381ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3382apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3383nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3384position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3385around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3386neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3387transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3388x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3389below.
3390
3391 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3392 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3393 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3394
3395The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3396resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3397multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3398of the factors' absolute values.
3399
327652be 3400Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3401
47e351a3
GM
3402 (1 0 0
3403 0 0 0
3404 9 9 -1)
3405
3406Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3407
3408 ( 2 -1 0
3409 -1 0 1
3410 0 1 -2)
3411
ba9eeda1
GM
3412ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3413``disabled''.
3414
47e351a3
GM
3415`:mask MASK'
3416
3417If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3418the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3419image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3420background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3421image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3422the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3423GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3424image.
a933dad1 3425
47e351a3
GM
3426If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3427in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3428`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3429
3430`:file FILE'
3431
3432Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3433search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3434building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3435may be present in the image specification.
3436
518df5c4
GM
3437`:data DATA'
3438
3439Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3440supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3441present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3442support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3443
a933dad1
DL
3444*** Supported image types
3445
b246b1f6 3446**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3447
3448XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3449properties supported are
3450
3451`:foreground FG'
3452
3453FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3454is the frame's foreground.
3455
46c5af7f 3456`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3457
3458BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3459the frame's background color.
3460
3461XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3462case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3463instead of a `:file' property.
3464
3465`:width WIDTH'
3466
3467WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3468
3469`:height HEIGHT'
3470
3471HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3472
3473`:data DATA'
3474
3475DATA must be either
3476
3477 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3478 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3479
3480 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3481
3482 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3483 bitmap.
3484
c76e04a8
GM
3485 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3486 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3487 in the file.
3488
a933dad1
DL
3489**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3490
3491XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3492`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3493found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3494`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3495
3496Additional image properties supported are:
3497
3498`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3499
3500SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3501name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3502name.
3503
3504XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3505add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3506
a933dad1
DL
3507The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3508to display compressed images.
3509
3510**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3511
3512PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3513mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3514mono images are
3515
3516`:foreground FG'
3517
3518FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3519is the frame's foreground.
3520
3521`:background FG'
3522
3523BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3524the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3525
3526**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3527
3528Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3529package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3530are:
3531
a933dad1
DL
3532**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3533
3534Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3535package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3536properties defined.
3537
3538**** GIF, image type `gif'
3539
3540Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3541`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3542
3543Additional image properties supported are:
3544
3545`:index INDEX'
3546
3547INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3548multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3549
3550This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3551For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3552at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3553every 0.1 seconds.
3554
3555(defun show-anim (file max)
3556 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3557 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3558
3559(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3560 (when (= idx max)
3561 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3562 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3563 (save-excursion
3564 (set-buffer buffer)
3565 (goto-char (point-min))
3566 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3567 (insert-image img "x"))
3568 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3569
3570**** PNG, image type `png'
3571
3572Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3573package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3574properties defined.
3575
3576**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3577
3578Additional image properties supported are:
3579
3580`:pt-width WIDTH'
3581
3582WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3583integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3584
3585`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3586
3587HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3588must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3589
3590`:bounding-box BOX'
3591
3592BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3593the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3594files. This is an required property.
3595
3596Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3597lisp/gs.el.
3598
3599*** Lisp interface.
3600
79214ddf
FP
3601The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3602which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3603
3604Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3605they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3606The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3607manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3608images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3609
3610*** Simplified image API, image.el
3611
3612The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3613creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3614can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3615define an image based on available image types. The functions
3616`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3617buffer.
3618
3619+++
3620** Display margins.
3621
3622Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3623and images.
3624
3625To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3626`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3627`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3628obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3629`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3630the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3631of the display margins.
3632
3633You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3634containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3635one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3636string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3637in this file).
3638
3639+++
3640** Help display
3641
3642Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3643moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3644`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3645that have a `help-echo' property.
3646
9662da0b 3647If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3648is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3649the window in which the help was found.
3650
3651If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3652`help-echo' text property was found.
3653
3654If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3655POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3656
3657If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3658the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3659mouse.
d5aa31d8 3660
9662da0b
GM
3661If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3662string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3663
3664For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3665determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3666property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3667For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3668used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3669
3670The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3671the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3672causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3673
3674+++
3675** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3676
3677The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3678This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3679
3680The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3681scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3682The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3683scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3684used.
3685
79214ddf
FP
3686 (global-set-key [A-down]
3687 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3688 (interactive)
79214ddf 3689 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3690 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3691 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3692 #'(lambda ()
3693 (interactive)
79214ddf 3694 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3695 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3696
3697+++
3698** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3699
3700Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3701when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3702variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3703is called with one argument, POS.
3704
3705At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3706characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3707as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3708property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3709`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3710
3711+++
3712** Tool bar support.
3713
3714Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3715parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3716controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3717suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3718`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3719automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3720
3721*** Tool bar item definitions
3722
3723Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3724`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3725where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3726
a933dad1
DL
3727CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3728evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3729the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3730property (see below).
79214ddf 3731
a933dad1
DL
3732BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3733binding are currently ignored.
3734
3735The following properties are recognized:
3736
3737`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3738
a933dad1
DL
3739FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3740or disabled.
79214ddf 3741
a933dad1 3742`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3743
a933dad1 3744FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3745
a933dad1
DL
3746`:filter FUNCTION'
3747
3748FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3749FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3750used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3751
a933dad1
DL
3752`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3753
3754TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3755and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3756
a933dad1
DL
3757`:image IMAGES'
3758
3759IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3760image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3761meaning of each of the four elements:
3762
3763 Index Use when item is
3764 ----------------------------------------
3765 0 enabled and selected
3766 1 enabled and deselected
3767 2 disabled and selected
3768 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3769
4ba7246d
GM
3770If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3771algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3772
a933dad1 3773`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3774
a933dad1
DL
3775Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3776is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3777
dab96841 3778The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3779toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3780to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3781menu bar.
dab96841 3782
8628686a
DL
3783The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3784dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3785buffer-locally to override the global map.
3786
a933dad1
DL
3787*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3788
3789If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3790resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3791than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3792
79214ddf 3793If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3794raised when the mouse moves over them.
3795
3796You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3797`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3798pixels. Default is 1.
3799
3800You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3801`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3802
3803*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3804
3805You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3806a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3807
3808 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3809 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3810 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3811
3812is the original tool bar item definition, then
3813
3814 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3815
3816makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3817item.
3818
3819** Mode line changes.
3820
3821+++
3822*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3823
3824The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3825that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3826a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3827
38281. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3829a `local-map' text property.
3830
38312. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3832that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3833
38343. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3835is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3836`local-map' property.
3837
3838The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3839properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3840example.
3841
54522c9f
GM
3842*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3843evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3844
a933dad1
DL
3845+++
3846*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3847variable mode-line-format to nil.
3848
3849+++
3850*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3851
3852This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3853`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3854completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3855`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3856line.
3857
3858The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3859`header-line'.
3860
3861The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3862position in the header-line.
3863
3864+++
3865** Text property `display'
3866
623a0aae
GM
3867The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3868replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3869also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3870the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3871below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3872
623a0aae
GM
3873*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3874
3875To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3876text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3877
3878If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3879marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3880the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3881is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3882simpler form STRING as property value.
3883
a933dad1
DL
3884*** Variable width and height spaces
3885
3886To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3887specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3888`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3889area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3890marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3891displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3892simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3893
3894The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3895PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3896properties described below.
3897
3898The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3899characters having the `display' property.
3900
3901- :width WIDTH
3902
3903Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3904character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3905
3906- :relative-width FACTOR
3907
3908Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3909first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3910same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3911width of that character by FACTOR.
3912
3913- :align-to HPOS
3914
3915Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3916value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3917
3918Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3919
3920- :height HEIGHT
3921
3922Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3923normal line height.
3924
3925- :relative-height FACTOR
3926
3927The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3928of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3929
3930- :ascent ASCENT
3931
3932Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3933used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3934baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3935equal to 100.
3936
3937You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3938
3939*** Images
3940
3941A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3942. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3943in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3944their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3945the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3946`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3947area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3948the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3949as display specification.
3950
3951*** Other display properties
3952
c9e73000 3953- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
3954
3955Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3956should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3957integer or float.
3958
c9e73000 3959- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
3960
3961Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3962
3963If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3964means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3965the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3966``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3967a font is available counts as a step.
3968
3969If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3970as tall as the frame's default font.
3971
3972If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3973height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3974
3975Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3976`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3977
c9e73000 3978- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
3979
3980FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3981font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3982raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3983amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 3984`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
3985
3986*** Conditional display properties
3987
3988All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3989has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3990applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3991During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3992the text having the `display' property.
3993
3994The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3995`(:when t SPEC)'.
3996
3997+++
3998** New menu separator types.
3999
4000Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4001item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4002treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4003to specify other menu separator types.
4004
4005- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4006
4007No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4008separator occurs.
4009
4010- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4011
4012A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4013
4014- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4015
4016A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4017
4018- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4019
4020A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4021
4022- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4023
4024A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4025
4026- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4027
4028A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4029displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4030
4031- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4032
4033A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4034
4035- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4036
4037A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4038
4039- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4040
4041A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4042
4043- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4044
4045Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4046
4047- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4048
4049Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4050
4051- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4052
4053Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4054
4055- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4056
4057Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4058
4059Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4060the corresponding single-line separators.
4061
4062+++
4063** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4064
4065The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4066`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4067Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4068that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4069default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4070default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4071default foreground is black.
4072
4073The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4074(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4075`ScrollBarBackground').
4076
4077Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4078settings for scroll bar colors.
4079
4080+++
4081** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4082display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4083
4084---
4085** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4086starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4087on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4088line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4089the original window start.
4090
4091---
4092** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4093`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4094now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4095
4096+++
4097** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4098
4099A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4100`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4101windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4102other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4103
4104The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4105fixed-width and fixed-height.
4106
4107 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4108
4109A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4110fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4111window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4112change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4113temporarily to nil, for example
4114
4115 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4116 (enlarge-window 10))
4117
79214ddf 4118Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4119or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4120
4121** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4122terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4123to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4124overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4125horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4126support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4127
3787e12e
GM
4128
4129^L
4130* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4131
4132** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4133input.
4134
4135** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4136
4137** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4138
4139** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4140only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4141exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4142(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4143(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4144
4145** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4146been added.
4147
4148^L
4149* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4150
4151** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4152
4153^L
4154* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4155
4156** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4157M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4158\f
4159* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4160
4161** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4162
4163You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4164Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4165`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4166
4167If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4168is the one that is used.
4169
4170** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4171the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4172Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4173separate from the command's regular output.
4174Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4175says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4176In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4177the buffer name.
4178
4179When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4180output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4181it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4182cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4183
4184** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4185the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4186is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4187created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4188
4189** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4190example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4191match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4192quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4193
4194** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4195now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4196if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4197they never ignore case.
4198
4199** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4200under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4201applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4202of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4203just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4204convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4205part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4206
4207If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4208the same format that was used in the file before.
4209
4210You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4211`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4212
4213** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4214renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4215This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4216
4217** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4218The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4219buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4220your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4221is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4222end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4223Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4224
4225The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4226eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4227control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4228format. You can now customize these variables.
4229
4230** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4231filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4232filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4233enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4234
4235** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4236in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4237windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4238
4239** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4240dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4241doesn't have any effect.
4242
4243** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4244not one per buffer.
4245
4246** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4247use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4248 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4249
4250** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4251To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4252`auto-show-mode' command.
4253
4254** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4255avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4256versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4257choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4258occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4259
4260** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4261cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4262
4263** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4264character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4265feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4266
4267** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4268the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4269interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4270and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4271
4272** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4273
4274The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4275that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4276one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4277codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4278set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4279
4280Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4281from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4282
4283IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4284equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4285a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4286`?' on other systems.
4287
4288IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4289feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4290Unix.
4291
4292Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4293current codepage when it starts.
4294
4295** Mail changes
4296
4297*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4298`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4299appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4300non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4301MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4302headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4303latin-1:
4304
4305 MIME-version: 1.0
4306 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4307 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4308
4309*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4310default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4311default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4312sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4313buffer-file-coding-system.
4314
4315You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4316sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4317mail.
4318
4319*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4320if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4321Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4322list of possible coding systems.
4323
4324** CC Mode changes
4325
4326*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4327modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4328longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4329docstring for details.
4330
4331*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4332symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4333found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4334prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4335lineup functions use this feature currently.
4336
4337*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4338"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4339
4340*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4341"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4342
4343*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4344from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4345symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4346c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4347anonymous classes.
4348
4349*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4350syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4351
4352*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4353inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4354support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4355function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4356
4357*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4358(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4359brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4360c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4361(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4362
4363*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4364
4365*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4366
4367*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4368for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4369
4370*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4371
4372*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4373associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4374This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4375circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4376class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4377
4378** Gnus changes.
4379
4380*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4381added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4382Gnus manual for the full story.
4383
4384*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4385before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4386group, which is created automatically.
4387
4388*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4389values.
4390
4391*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4392
4393*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4394outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4395
4396*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4397`C-u C-c C-c'.
4398
4399*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4400
4401*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4402re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4403
4404*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4405
4406*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4407Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4408
4409*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4410`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4411
4412*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4413control over simplification.
4414
4415*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4416
4417*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4418limit.
4419
4420*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4421
4422*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4423
4424*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4425If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4426rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4427
4428*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4429`a' forces normal posting method.
4430
4431*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4432-- `W d'.
4433
4434*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4435to a non-nil value.
4436
4437*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4438where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4439
4440*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4441has been added.
4442
4443*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4444
4445*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4446
4447*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4448`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4449
4450*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4451`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4452
4453*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4454
4455*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4456been added.
4457
4458*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4459`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4460
4461*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4462updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4463
4464*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4465
4466*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4467
4468*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4469
4470** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4471
4472*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4473options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4474nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4475
4476*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4477TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4478of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4479TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4480can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4481
4482*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4483All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4484but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4485the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4486
4487*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4488the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4489buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4490mismatch.
4491
4492** Changes to RefTeX mode
4493
4494*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4495file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4496
4497*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4498lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4499characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4500removed from the label.
4501
4502*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4503a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4504
4505*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4506customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4507
4508*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4509`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4510expressions.
4511
4512*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4513
4514** New/deleted modes and packages
4515
4516*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4517SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4518
4519*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4520editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4521SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4522
4523*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4524changes with a special face.
4525
4526*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4527this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4528Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4529\f
4530* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4531
4532** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4533This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4534conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4535and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4536check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4537
4538The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4539Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4540distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4541
4542** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4543MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4544controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4545directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4546Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4547on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4548string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4549program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4550printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4551
4552** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4553output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4554available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4555input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4556temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4557program.
4558
4559An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4560and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4561programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4562automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4563as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4564ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4565
4566** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4567a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4568MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4569was not documented clearly before.
4570
4571** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4572This includes Tetris and Snake.
4573\f
4574* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4575
4576** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4577return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4578They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4579meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4580
4581** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4582WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4583and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4584
4585** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4586
4587*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4588It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4589
4590*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4591the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4592integers.
4593
4594** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4595files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4596arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4597file names and attributes are returned.
4598
4599** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4600sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4601accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4602It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4603returns the result.
4604
4605** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4606to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4607
4608** New functions for base64 conversion:
4609
4610The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4611into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4612performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4613optionally.
4614
4615Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4616job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4617
4618**
4619The new function process-running-child-p
4620will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4621terminal to its own child process.
4622
4623** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4624when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4625to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4626itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4627
4628** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4629be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4630
4631** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4632:included is an alias for :visible.
4633
4634easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4635easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4636to move or copy menu entries.
4637
4638** Multibyte editing changes
4639
4640*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4641an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4642make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4643work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4644char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4645 (setq char (sref str idx)
4646 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4647The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4648
4649If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4650(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4651 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4652
4653*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4654region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4655deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4656
4657 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4658
4659This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4660across the boundary.
4661
4662*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4663`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4664 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4665 contains 8-bit characters.
4666 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4667 contains invalid characters.
4668
4669*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4670text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4671preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4672text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4673way.
4674
4675*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4676If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4677end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4678prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4679
4680*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4681compose Thai characters in a string.
4682
4683** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4684argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4685for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4686menus should always use the third argument.
4687
4688** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4689read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4690arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4691input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4692
4693** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4694of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4695programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4696inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4697
4698** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4699the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4700returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4701echo area contents.
4702
4703 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4704
4705** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4706NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4707requested feature cannot be loaded.
4708
4709** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4710foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4711means to clear out that attribute.
4712
4713** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4714gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4715
4716** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4717read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4718unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4719end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4720
4721** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4722the gap of the current buffer.
4723
4724** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4725to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4726current buffer.
4727
4728** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4729facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4730These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4731it back in after any modifications have been made.
4732\f
4733* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4734
4735** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4736the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4737/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4738directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4739subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4740
4741Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4742names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4743Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4744which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4745these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4746
4747Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4748starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4749time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4750
4751This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4752Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4753to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4754subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4755`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4756results.
4757
4758** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4759GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4760that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4761fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4762\f
4763* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4764
4765** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4766including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4767it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4768perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4769
4770** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4771specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4772region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4773further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4774command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4775within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4776are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4777region.
4778
4779In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4780selective undo.
4781
4782** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4783unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4784buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4785effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4786Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4787
4788The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4789though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4790-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4791load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4792
4793** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4794no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4795enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4796something that most users not do.
4797
4798** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4799operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4800The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4801applications.
4802
4803C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4804pasting operations.
4805
4806** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4807setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4808like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4809printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4810`ps-printer-name'.
4811
4812** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4813minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4814any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4815except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4816incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4817hits a new word.
4818
4819Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4820Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4821to be confused by TeX commands.
4822
4823You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4824correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4825clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4826of various alternative replacements and actions.
4827
4828Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4829the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4830corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4831alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4832flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4833
4834Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4835flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4836
4837** Changes in input method usage.
4838
4839Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4840the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4841respectively.
4842
4843You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4844
4845If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4846of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4847
4848The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4849that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4850
4851 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4852
4853 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4854
4855 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4856 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4857
4858 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4859 given in the following case:
4860 o When you are using a complex input method.
4861 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4862
4863If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4864input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4865and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4866setting it to t is helpful.
4867
4868The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4869
4870In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4871keys:
4872 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4873 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4874 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4875These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4876environment.
4877
4878** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4879names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4880minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4881get
4882
4883 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4884
4885which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4886
4887Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4888Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4889
4890** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4891at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4892its owner and group.
4893
4894** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4895Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4896
4897** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4898contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4899
4900** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4901which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4902in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4903by the left edge of the rectangle.
4904
4905** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4906increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4907C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4908for writing keyboard macros.
4909
4910** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4911files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4912frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4913the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4914additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4915info.
4916
4917** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4918
4919** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4920query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4921contents only.
4922
4923** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4924confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4925the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4926says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4927
4928** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4929non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4930literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4931
4932** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4933now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4934Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4935inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4936
4937** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4938failure if the command produces no output.
4939
4940** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4941manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4942the mouse.
4943
4944** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4945mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4946function and variable names.
4947
4948** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4949reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4950file-coding-system-alist.
4951
4952** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4953t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4954converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4955the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4956according to the current fontset.
4957
4958** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4959
4960The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4961that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4962nonascii-insert-offset.
4963
4964For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4965enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4966nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4967characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4968
4969** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4970an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4971
4972** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4973letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4974
4975** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4976are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4977command keys.
4978
4979** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4980user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4981
4982Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4983user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4984all variables that have documentation.
4985
4986** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4987shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4988that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4989minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4990it should show; the default is 20.
4991
4992Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4993the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4994of your input.
4995
4996** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4997all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4998recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4999argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5000the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5001Newly added options are included as well.
5002
5003If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5004then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5005for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5006
5007This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5008Customize menu.
5009
5010** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5011the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5012
5013** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5014buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5015invoked.
5016
5017** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5018that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5019The default is 1.
5020
5021** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5022syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5023new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5024(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5025sensibly.
5026
5027** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5028
5029** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5030value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5031two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5032
5033** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5034reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5035for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5036every night.
5037
5038** Desktop changes
5039
5040*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5041the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5042
5043*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5044and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5045
5046** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5047read and post multi-lingual articles.
5048
5049** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5050doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5051be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5052outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5053the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5054made invisible again.
5055
5056** Mail reading and sending changes
5057
5058*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5059the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5060changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5061toggle.
5062
5063*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5064now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5065summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5066the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5067rmail-default-body-file.
5068
5069*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5070longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5071handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5072
5073*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5074it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5075is evaluated to insert the signature.
5076
5077*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5078outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5079handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5080putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5081transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5082especially interested in trying feedmail.
5083
5084feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5085feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5086provided by feedmail are:
5087
5088**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5089stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5090there is also a queue for draft messages
5091
5092**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5093be prompted for confirmation
5094
5095**** does smart filling of address headers
5096
5097**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5098the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5099can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5100
5101**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5102the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5103/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5104function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5105
5106** Dired changes
5107
5108*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5109files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5110
5111*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5112run Dired on the directory name at point.
5113
5114*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5115files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5116for a specified regexp.
5117
5118** VC Changes
5119
5120*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5121conveniently.
5122
5123*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5124faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5125Dired.
5126
5127VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5128directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5129listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5130currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5131
5132You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5133then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5134vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5135control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5136on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5137
5138All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5139is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5140`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5141the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5142`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5143
5144The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5145toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5146VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5147`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5148
5149Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5150ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5151command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5152
5153*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5154file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5155session to resolve them.
5156
5157Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5158resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5159contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5160uses as well).
5161
5162*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5163command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5164you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5165either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5166branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5167If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5168using ediff.
5169
5170** Changes in Font Lock
5171
5172*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5173are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5174use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5175unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5176compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5177
5178** Frame name display changes
5179
5180*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5181frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5182raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5183when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5184
5185*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5186frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5187menu.
5188
5189** Comint (subshell) changes
5190
5191*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5192subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5193with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5194
5195*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5196
5197C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5198that is, the line after the last line you got.
5199You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5200
5201C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5202send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5203the following line.
5204
5205C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5206which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5207previously sent input.
5208
5209C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5210it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5211as the search string.
5212
5213*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5214automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5215
5216** C mode changes
5217
5218*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5219and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5220assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5221definition.
5222
5223*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5224(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5225Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5226style is still the default however.
5227
5228*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5229
5230*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5231are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5232them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5233
5234*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5235and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5236
5237*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5238namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5239
5240*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5241makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5242
5243*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5244c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5245
5246*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5247should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5248package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5249variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5250
5251** Changes to hippie-expand.
5252
5253*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5254non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5255which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5256
5257*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5258non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5259expanding dynamically.
5260
5261*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5262non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5263
5264*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5265non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5266this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5267expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5268
5269*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5270
5271** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5272
5273*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5274bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5275automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5276bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5277against the first word in the title.
5278
5279*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5280capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5281bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5282lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5283lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5284bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5285
5286*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5287generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5288replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5289bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5290
5291** Changes in vcursor.el.
5292
5293*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5294and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5295variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5296entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5297`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5298in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5299
5300*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5301Editing group once the package is loaded.
5302
5303*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5304generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5305vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5306
5307*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5308vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5309
5310** Ispell changes.
5311
5312*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5313buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5314are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5315
5316*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5317A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5318and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5319defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5320include:
5321
5322 o URLs are automatically skipped
5323 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5324
5325*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5326
5327** Changes to RefTeX mode
5328
5329RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5330large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5331re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5332section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5333
5334*** New recursive parser.
5335
5336The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5337entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5338recursive parser scans the individual files.
5339
5340*** Parsing only part of a document.
5341
5342Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5343partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5344the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5345
5346 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5347
5348*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5349
5350This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5351
5352 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5353
5354*** Using multiple selection buffers
5355
5356If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5357for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5358
5359 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5360
5361*** References to external documents.
5362
5363The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5364documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5365documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5366macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5367RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5368the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5369The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5370
5371*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5372
5373The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5374and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5375
5376Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5377the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5378
5379*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5380
5381The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5382buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5383
5384*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5385
5386The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5387contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5388`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5389have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5390enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5391at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5392more.
5393
5394*** Support for the varioref package
5395
5396The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5397
5398*** New hooks
5399
5400Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5401and citations are created. These hooks are
5402`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5403`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5404
5405*** Citations outside LaTeX
5406
5407The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5408a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5409
5410*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5411
5412The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5413fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5414fontified, use
5415
5416 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5417
5418** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5419With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5420the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5421directories that contain the same file name.
5422
5423Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5424Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5425file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5426Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5427have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5428names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5429directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5430directory.
5431
5432** New modes and packages
5433
5434*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5435It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5436it, but some do not.
5437
5438*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5439code.
5440
5441*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5442current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5443around in a buffer.
5444
5445Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5446
5447*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5448uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5449be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5450established system of notation similar to Chess.
5451
5452*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5453documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5454guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5455
5456*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5457available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5458system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5459simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5460functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5461the like.
5462
5463*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5464identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5465
5466*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5467within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5468used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5469the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5470
5471*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5472
5473 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5474 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5475 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5476 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5477 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5478 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5479 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5480 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5481 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5482 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5483 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5484
5485 Platform-specific modes:
5486
5487 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5488 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5489 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5490 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5491 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5492 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5493 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5494 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5495 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5496\f
5497* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5498
5499** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5500use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5501That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5502Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5503
5504Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5505you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5506consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5507
5508** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5509and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5510specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5511searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5512
5513** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5514multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5515character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5516environment.
5517
5518** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5519take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5520string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5521current input method for reading this one event.
5522
5523** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5524now control whether to output certain characters as
5525backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5526non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5527characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5528in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5529\f
5530* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5531
5532** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5533of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5534
5535** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5536in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5537always increases point by 1.
5538
5539The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5540considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5541
5542See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5543
5544** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5545Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5546default value changed. For example,
5547
5548 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5549 :type 'integer
5550 :group 'foo
5551 :version "20.3")
5552
5553 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5554 :version "20.3")
5555
5556If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5557default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5558is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5559`:version' in the top level group.
5560
5561This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5562
5563** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5564starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5565
5566However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5567symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5568support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5569to themselves.
5570
5571If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5572this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5573values whatever.
5574
5575** There is a new debugger command, R.
5576It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5577in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5578
5579** Frame-local variables.
5580
5581You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5582the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5583local bindings for that variable.
5584
5585These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5586frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5587modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5588parameter name.
5589
5590Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5591Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5592active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5593that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5594
5595It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5596clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5597very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5598through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5599
5600** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5601"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5602evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5603makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5604See the documentation in sregex.el.
5605
5606** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5607is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5608parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5609The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5610
5611** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5612If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5613
5614** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5615known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5616define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5617
5618** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5619when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5620it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5621history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5622
5623The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5624return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5625empty input.
5626
5627** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5628for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5629`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5630Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5631`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5632
5633** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5634echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5635a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5636default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5637
5638** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5639specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5640function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5641place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5642non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5643
5644** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5645If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5646up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5647end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5648
5649** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5650which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5651If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5652
5653** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5654holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5655was directed to display this buffer.
5656
5657** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5658with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5659describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5660other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5661set-window-configuration.
5662
5663** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5664window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5665positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5666windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5667
5668** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5669override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5670look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5671
5672If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5673non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5674map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5675
5676minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5677and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5678
5679** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5680except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5681
5682** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5683USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5684floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5685
5686** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5687to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5688in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5689it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5690
5691** Menu changes
5692
5693*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5694keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5695better supported.
5696
5697The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5698a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5699you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5700can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5701then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5702
5703*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5704
5705In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5706 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5707defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5708starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5709
5710The format is:
5711 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5712 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5713where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5714string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5715The supported properties include
5716
5717:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5718 item is enabled.
5719:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5720 item should appear in the menu.
5721:filter FILTER-FN
5722 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5723 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5724 It should return a binding to use instead.
5725:keys DESCRIPTION
5726 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5727 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5728 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5729:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5730 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5731 keyboard binding.
5732:key-sequence nil
5733 This means that the command normally has no
5734 keyboard equivalent.
5735:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5736:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5737 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5738 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5739 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5740
5741Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5742Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5743
5744(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5745
5746** New event types
5747
5748*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5749mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5750corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5751which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5752
5753 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5754
5755where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5756same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5757indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5758negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5759the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5760forward, away from the user.
5761
5762As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5763
5764*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5765files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5766and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5767filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5768loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5769
5770 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5771
5772where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5773same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5774that were dragged and dropped.
5775
5776As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5777
5778** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5779
5780*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5781any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5782to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5783
5784*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5785can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5786that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5787
5788*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5789in Emacs 19 and before.
5790
5791The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5792The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5793
5794*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5795buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5796unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5797representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5798
5799This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5800as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5801viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5802one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5803will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5804
5805This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5806representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5807(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5808consistent with the new representation.
5809
5810*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5811representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5812about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5813however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5814
5815The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5816nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5817using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5818
5819*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5820representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5821representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5822
5823The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5824loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5825is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5826
5827*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5828which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5829
5830*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5831which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5832
5833*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5834portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5835so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5836You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5837
5838*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5839it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5840
5841*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5842convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5843buffer or string being searched.
5844
5845One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5846[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5847searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5848searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5849obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5850you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5851expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5852
5853*** Structure of coding system changed.
5854
5855All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5856by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5857which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5858as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5859vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5860your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5861define-coding-system-alias.
5862
5863The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5864the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5865access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5866pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5867character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5868safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5869'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5870`iso-8859-1'.
5871
5872Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5873The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5874coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5875(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5876
5877Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5878also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5879are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5880the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5881
5882*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5883proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5884This function requires a user interaction.
5885
5886*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5887find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5888select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5889systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5890a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5891select-safe-coding-system.
5892
5893*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5894decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5895last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5896was done.
5897
5898*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5899used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5900coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5901
5902*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5903return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5904characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5905`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5906
5907*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5908coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5909coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5910converted.
5911
5912*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5913coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5914
5915*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5916character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5917character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5918each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5919either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5920range of characters.
5921
5922*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5923Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5924
5925*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5926in the current buffer at position POS.
5927
5928*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5929input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5930function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5931character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5932event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5933binding input-method-function to nil.
5934
5935The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5936method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5937input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5938the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5939not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5940
5941The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5942subsequent events of a key sequence.
5943
5944*** You can customize any language environment by using
5945set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5946
5947The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5948customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5949instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5950environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5951exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5952\f
5953* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5954
5955** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5956options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5957at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5958tree structure.
5959
5960M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5961user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5962
5963With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5964session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5965in your .emacs file.)
5966
5967** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5968You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5969
5970** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5971This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5972
5973** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5974immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5975kills the region.
5976
5977The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5978delete the character before point, as usual.
5979
5980** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5981on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5982by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5983
5984** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5985insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5986the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5987onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5988history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5989past.)
5990
5991** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5992This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5993in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5994TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5995makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5996
5997As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5998and is an alias for it.
5999
6000If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6001use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6002
6003** Scrolling changes
6004
6005*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6006position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6007
6008In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6009on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6010where it started.
6011
6012*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6013move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6014screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6015does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6016
6017*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6018top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6019comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6020recenters the window.
6021
6022** International character set support (MULE)
6023
6024Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6025including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6026Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6027Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6028features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6029MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6030
6031Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6032coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6033character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6034variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6035into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6036
6037Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6038generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6039supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6040language, to make it possible to type them.
6041
6042The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6043character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6044
6045The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6046to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6047
6048You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6049
6050 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6051
6052Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6053characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6054argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6055already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6056characters for their work until they want to change.
6057
6058*** Input methods
6059
6060An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6061specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6062has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6063the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6064support several input methods.
6065
6066The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6067another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6068work.
6069
6070A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6071characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6072composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6073consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6074sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6075letter.
6076
6077The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6078by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6079First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6080marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6081mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6082
6083None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6084they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6085phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6086converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6087
6088Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6089word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6090typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6091the first guess is wrong.
6092
6093*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6094turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6095
6096If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6097byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6098they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6099the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6100
6101However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6102use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6103includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6104translate automatically to and from either one.
6105
6106*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6107
6108Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6109file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6110sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6111what you want.
6112
6113If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6114example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6115system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6116multibyte characters in that buffer.
6117
6118If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6119character conversion as well.
6120
6121*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6122
6123A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6124Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6125requires using many fonts.
6126
6127Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6128collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6129
6130A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6131the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6132have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6133you would use a font.
6134
6135If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6136specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6137display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6138
6139The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6140(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6141characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6142or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6143and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6144
6145*** Defining fontsets.
6146
6147Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6148chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6149with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6150
6151Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6152of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6153`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6154standard fontset are created automatically.
6155
6156If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6157argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6158FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6159with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6160name is `fontset-startup'.
6161
6162Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6163The resource value should have this form:
6164 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6165FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6166 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6167 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6168 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6169The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6170of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6171CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6172FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6173
6174Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6175last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6176You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6177
6178For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6179font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6180following resource,
6181 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6182the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6183 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6184Here is the substitution rule:
6185 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6186 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6187 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6188 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6189 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6190
6191The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6192fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6193that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6194
6195With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6196like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6197name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6198fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6199fontsets.
6200
6201*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6202defaults for a particular choice of language.
6203
6204Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6205method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6206visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6207already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6208language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6209system for new files that you create.
6210
6211It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6212set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6213whole Emacs session.
6214
6215For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6216chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6217with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6218
6219*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6220specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6221specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6222the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6223coding systems that Emacs supports.
6224
6225*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6226lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6227This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6228After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6229is used for *the immediately following command*.
6230
6231So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6232write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6233
6234If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6235then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6236
6237For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6238visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6239
6240*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6241construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6242to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6243specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6244of the file.
6245
6246*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6247the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6248code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6249translated into that character code.
6250
6251This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6252various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6253
6254By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6255
6256*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6257the coding system for keyboard input.
6258
6259Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6260with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6261some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6262
6263By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6264
6265Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6266input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6267translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6268to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6269designed to work with terminals.
6270
6271*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6272specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6273This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6274has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6275translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6276in the corresponding buffer.
6277
6278By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6279
6280*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6281to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6282It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6283
6284*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6285an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6286command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6287want to use.
6288
6289C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6290method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6291
6292*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6293layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6294remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6295which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6296
6297*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6298the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6299related information.
6300
6301*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6302HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6303scripts.
6304
6305*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6306information about the support for a particular language.
6307You specify the language as an argument.
6308
6309*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6310the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6311first dash.
6312
6313A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6314(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6315whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
63161 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6317
6318 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6319 B big5 (Chinese)
6320 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6321 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6322 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6323 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6324 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6325 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6326 K euc-korea (Korean)
6327 R koi8 (Russian)
6328 Q tibetan
6329 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6330 T lao
6331 T tis620 (Thai)
6332 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6333 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6334 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6335 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6336 z hz (Chinese)
6337
6338When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6339two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6340coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6341keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6342
6343*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6344conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6345
6346When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6347into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6348rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6349Rmail files themselves.
6350
6351*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6352conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6353
6354Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6355for sending mail:
6356
6357- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6358- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6359- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6360 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6361- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6362
6363*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6364to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6365Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6366translations.
6367
6368** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6369of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6370insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6371without any conversion.
6372
6373** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6374You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6375RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6376any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6377
6378** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6379functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6380
6381Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6382Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6383
6384Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6385mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6386
6387** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6388complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6389in the buffer before point.
6390
6391With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6392symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6393you are using.
6394
6395With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6396just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6397
6398** File locking works with NFS now.
6399
6400The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6401in the same directory as FILENAME.
6402
6403This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6404works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6405can become a bottleneck.
6406
6407The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6408does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6409create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6410file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6411rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6412so useful that the change is worth while.
6413
6414When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6415are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6416collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6417tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6418
6419** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6420it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6421show-paren-mode.
6422
6423** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6424selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6425delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6426
6427** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6428within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6429complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6430
6431** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6432it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6433set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6434
6435** Changes in View mode.
6436
6437*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6438Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6439
6440*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6441view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6442
6443*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6444previous state.
6445
6446*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6447scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6448
6449*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6450non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6451not just the selected window.
6452
6453*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6454read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6455turns View mode on or off.
6456
6457*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6458how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6459delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6460
6461** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6462now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6463
6464** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6465has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6466presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6467which version to compare with.
6468
6469** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6470blocks if a match is inside the block.
6471
6472The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6473is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6474isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6475shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6476
6477By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6478of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6479blocks, all of them or none.
6480
6481** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6482current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6483confirmation first.
6484
6485** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6486now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6487However, the mode will not be changed if
6488(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6489(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6490 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6491(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6492
6493This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6494
6495However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6496these commands do not change the major mode.
6497
6498** M-x occur changes.
6499
6500*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6501it performs a case-sensitive search.
6502
6503*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6504if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6505using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6506
6507** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6508in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6509window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6510that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6511buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6512
6513** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6514after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6515appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6516come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6517
6518** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6519selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6520buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6521
6522** Outline mode changes.
6523
6524*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6525
6526*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6527
6528** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6529you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6530Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6531was already active.
6532
6533The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6534unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6535get confused by it.
6536
6537If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6538set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6539
6540** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6541
6542*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6543conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6544character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6545including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6546
6547The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6548mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6549copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6550
6551*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6552are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6553values.
6554
6555`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6556case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6557`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6558case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6559
6560** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6561certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6562can be. The default value is 30.
6563
6564** Changes in Mail mode.
6565
6566*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6567Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6568composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6569`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6570`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6571behavior.
6572
6573C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6574compose-mail-other-frame.
6575
6576*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6577the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6578replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6579buffer that shows the original message.
6580
6581*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6582with separator lines around the contents.
6583
6584*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6585in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6586definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6587need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6588
6589*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6590
6591**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6592for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6593controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6594Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6595
6596**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6597to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6598/etc/passwd.
6599
6600**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6601to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6602/etc/passwd.
6603
6604** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6605special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6606directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6607reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6608
6609Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6610when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6611be taken to be magic.
6612
6613** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6614files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6615available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6616
6617M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6618(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6619
6620** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6621suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6622
6623In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6624
6625new key dired.el binding old key
6626------- ---------------- -------
6627 * c dired-change-marks c
6628 * m dired-mark m
6629 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6630 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6631 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6632 * u dired-unmark u
6633 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6634 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6635 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6636 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6637 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6638 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6639
6640** Rmail changes.
6641
6642*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6643saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6644chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6645each time you run it.
6646
6647*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6648whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6649
6650*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6651messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6652means to move in the opposite direction.
6653
6654*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6655you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6656
6657*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6658just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6659It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6660can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6661for output.
6662
6663** Gnus changes.
6664
6665*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6666
6667*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6668Gnus.
6669
6670*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6671`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6672
6673*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6674article mode line.
6675
6676*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6677
6678*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6679
6680(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6681
6682*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6683are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6684`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6685
6686*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6687
6688*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6689
6690*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6691See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6692
6693*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6694Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6695used to pick articles.
6696
6697*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6698another have been added.
6699
6700 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6701
6702*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6703generating lines in buffers.
6704
6705*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6706`M-C-_'.
6707
6708*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6709
6710*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6711
6712 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6713
6714*** Scores can be decayed.
6715
6716 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6717
6718*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6719Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6720
6721*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6722the native server.
6723
6724 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6725
6726*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6727(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6728
6729*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6730
6731*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6732even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6733
6734*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6735(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6736
6737 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6738 a group.
6739
6740*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6741sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6742
6743 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6744
6745*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6746
6747 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6748
6749*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6750
6751 Use the `Y c' command.
6752
6753*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6754
6755*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6756
6757 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6758
6759*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6760from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6761
6762 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6763
6764*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6765
6766*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6767the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6768
6769 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6770
6771Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6772and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6773from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6774hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6775this issue.)
6776
6777Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6778automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6779particular news group. This can be done by:
6780
6781 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6782
6783Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6784of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6785"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6786system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6787for reading and posting).
6788
6789CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6790 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6791Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6792newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6793there.
6794
6795Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6796default. Here are some of these default settings:
6797
6798 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6799 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6800 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6801 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6802 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6803
6804When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6805the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6806
6807** CC mode changes.
6808
6809*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6810code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6811values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6812this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6813Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6814loaded.
6815
6816If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6817Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6818style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6819share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6820c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6821must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6822
6823*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6824of the current buffer.
6825
6826*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6827it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6828of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6829
6830*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6831style that the Python developers like.
6832
6833*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6834This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6835just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6836
6837** VC Changes [new]
6838
6839** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6840name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6841directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6842
6843This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6844master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6845developers.
6846
6847You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6848RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6849
6850*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6851other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6852writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6853calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6854
6855*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6856version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6857
6858** Calendar changes.
6859
6860A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6861of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6862for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6863
6864** ps-print changes
6865
6866There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6867
6868*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6869
6870The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6871formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6872`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6873`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6874It defaults to `letter'.
6875If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6876
6877The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6878of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6879non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6880
6881The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6882It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6883It defaults to 1.
6884
6885*** Horizontal layout
6886
6887The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6888`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6889All are measured in points.
6890
6891*** Vertical layout
6892
6893The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6894`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6895All are measured in points.
6896
6897*** Headers
6898
6899If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6900`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6901margin above the text.
6902
6903If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6904framing box is printed around the header.
6905
6906The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6907`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6908
6909The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6910`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6911`ps-header-font-size'.
6912
6913*** Font managing
6914
6915The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6916used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6917`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6918elements to this alist.
6919
6920The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6921for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6922
6923** hideshow changes.
6924
6925*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6926C++, ; for lisp).
6927
6928*** Support for java-mode added.
6929
6930*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6931in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6932
6933*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6934the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6935way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6936
6937*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6938robust and a lot faster.
6939
6940*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6941
6942*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6943to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6944documentation for more details.
6945
6946** Changes in Enriched mode.
6947
6948*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6949filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6950of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6951use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6952the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6953
6954*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6955distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6956as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6957as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6958
6959** Font Lock mode
6960
6961*** Custom support
6962
6963The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6964font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6965faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6966group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6967your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6968consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6969
6970You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6971
6972*** Maximum decoration
6973
6974Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6975default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6976of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6977supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6978to get the old behavior.
6979
6980*** New support
6981
6982Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6983
6984Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6985support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6986
6987*** Configurable support
6988
6989Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6990additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6991c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6992java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6993list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6994of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6995convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6996
6997Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6998way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6999it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7000
7001*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7002
7003You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7004highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7005for any mode.
7006
7007For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7008
7009 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7010
7011in your ~/.emacs.
7012
7013*** New faces
7014
7015Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7016font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7017distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7018to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7019
7020*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7021
7022The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7023cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7024same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7025
7026*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7027
7028The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7029according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7030the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7031non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7032refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7033the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7034Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7035
7036This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7037For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7038this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7039refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7040containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7041the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7042
7043As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7044
7045Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7046Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7047Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7048new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7049
7050If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7051settings.
7052
7053** Ada mode changes.
7054
7055*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7056If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7057procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7058you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7059stubs.
7060
7061*** There are two new commands:
7062 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7063 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7064
7065The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7066`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7067`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7068
7069*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7070is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7071Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7072
7073*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7074formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7075places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7076space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7077
7078** Scheme mode changes.
7079
7080*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7081mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7082for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7083with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7084have any effect.
7085
7086If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7087still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7088scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7089variables as buffer-local variables.
7090
7091*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7092Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7093
7094** Changes to the emacsclient program
7095
7096*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7097USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7098associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7099can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7100
7101*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7102it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7103buffer in Emacs.
7104
7105*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7106use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7107ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7108option takes precedence.
7109
7110** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7111constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7112(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7113
7114** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7115which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7116the current defun.
7117
7118** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7119following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7120
7121** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7122and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7123necessary).
7124
7125** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7126if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7127these register values no longer become completely useless.
7128If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7129asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7130it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7131
7132** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7133example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7134be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7135you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7136
7137You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7138variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7139file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7140revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7141only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7142
7143** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7144since it applies only to the current frame.
7145
7146** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7147file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7148and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7149
7150This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7151multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7152variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7153tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7154instead of just the file you are editing.
7155
7156** RefTeX mode
7157
7158RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7159and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7160different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7161multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7162turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7163
7164C-c ( reftex-label
7165 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7166 knows which kind of label is needed.
7167
7168C-c ) reftex-reference
7169 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7170 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7171
7172C-c [ reftex-citation
7173 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7174 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7175
7176C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7177 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7178
7179C-c = reftex-toc
7180 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7181 can quickly jump to every section.
7182
7183Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7184commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7185Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7186reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7187C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7188
7189** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7190
7191*** Info documentation is now available.
7192
7193*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7194both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7195
7196*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7197bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7198
7199*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7200(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7201
7202*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7203entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7204appropriate functions.
7205
7206*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7207entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7208
7209*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7210been cleaned.
7211
7212*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7213bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7214
7215*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7216shall be delimited.
7217
7218*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7219bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7220bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7221
7222*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7223field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7224prefixed with `ALT'.
7225
7226*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7227bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7228formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7229documentation).
7230
7231*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7232documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7233for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7234
7235*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7236comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7237
7238*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7239alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7240signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7241
7242*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7243
7244*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7245
7246*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7247from alien sources.
7248
7249*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7250to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7251crossref entries.
7252
7253*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7254region.
7255
7256*** Added support for imenu.
7257
7258*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7259of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7260`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7261`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7262
7263*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7264from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7265
7266** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7267
7268** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7269
7270** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7271functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7272Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7273as an argument.
7274
7275When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7276and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7277
7278** browse-url changes
7279
7280*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7281Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7282(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7283non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7284customization variables.
7285
7286*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7287
7288*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7289lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7290(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7291
7292** Changes in Ediff
7293
7294*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7295pops up the Info file for this command.
7296
7297*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7298the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7299merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7300directories).
7301
7302*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7303and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7304files in the same directory.
7305
7306*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7307The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7308related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7309
7310** Changes in Viper
7311
7312*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7313*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7314 instead of vip-.
7315*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7316*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7317Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7318*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7319*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7320*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7321color when Viper is in insert state.
7322*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7323Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7324viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7325
7326** Etags changes.
7327
7328*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7329default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7330Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7331variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7332not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7333
7334*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7335
7336*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7337constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7338
7339*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7340recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7341In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7342
7343*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7344C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7345recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7346methods and protocols.
7347
7348*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7349.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7350column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7351paragraph name.
7352
7353*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7354an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7355at least M times and as many as N times.
7356
7357** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7358in files has changed slightly.
7359
7360With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7361time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7362This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7363with old time-stamp-format values.
7364
7365In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7366(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7367This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7368reasons.
7369
7370In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7371natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7372fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7373(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7374time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7375specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7376
7377Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7378case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7379truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7380
7381The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7382being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7383future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7384recommended now will continue to work then.
7385
7386See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7387details.
7388
7389** There are some additional major modes:
7390
7391dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7392m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7393meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7394
7395** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7396copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7397into Emacs.
7398
7399** New Lisp packages include:
7400
7401*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7402
7403*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7404be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7405
7406*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7407
7408*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7409in shell buffers.
7410
7411*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7412See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7413and `elint-defun'.
7414
7415*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7416meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7417ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7418strings or comments.
7419
7420These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7421abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7422you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7423insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7424at these points.
7425
7426*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7427can visit them by short forms of their names.
7428
7429*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7430Emacs Lisp function at point.
7431
7432*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7433
7434*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7435switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7436
7437*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7438
7439*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7440
7441*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7442
7443*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7444from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7445
7446*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7447You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7448inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7449original place after inserting the copy.
7450
7451*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7452on the buffer.
7453
7454You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7455velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7456(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7457
7458Enable mouse-drag with:
7459 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7460-or-
7461 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7462
7463*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7464mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7465
7466*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7467It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7468
7469*** ogonek
7470
7471The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7472Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7473platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7474TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7475ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7476prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7477instance) and vice versa.
7478
7479To use this package load it using
7480 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7481Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7482 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7483 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7484The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7485ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7486
7487*** Interface to ph.
7488
7489Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7490
7491The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7492services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7493these servers.
7494
7495*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7496
7497*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7498You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7499while the real cursor does not move.
7500
7501*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7502for visiting your favorite web sites.
7503
7504*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7505so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7506
7507** movemail change
7508
7509Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7510mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7511supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7512user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7513
7514This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7515\f
7516* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7517
7518** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7519
7520Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7521end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7522Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7523file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7524file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7525
7526To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7527C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7528coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7529specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7530LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7531save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7532\f
7533* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7534
7535** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7536Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7537vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7538Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7539
7540** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7541to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7542
7543In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7544don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7545"win".
7546
7547** Basic Lisp changes
7548
7549*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7550evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7551
7552*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7553be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7554or by the user.
7555
7556The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7557
7558*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7559
7560(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7561(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7562
7563*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7564usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7565its argument.
7566
7567*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7568
7569*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7570
7571*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7572
7573*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7574error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7575include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7576`format' function.
7577
7578*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7579or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7580whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7581
7582*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7583either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7584adding one of these suffixes.
7585
7586*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7587which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7588If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7589
7590We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7591because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7592
7593*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7594
7595*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7596You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7597
7598*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7599conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7600
7601 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7602
7603BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7604BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7605
7606*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7607choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7608restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7609works using `save-current-buffer'.
7610
7611*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7612write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7613of the last form.
7614
7615*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7616which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7617last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7618as the last form.
7619
7620*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7621characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7622matches.
7623
7624For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7625
7626*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7627with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7628Then it returns that string.
7629
7630For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7631
7632(with-output-to-string
7633 (princ "The buffer is ")
7634 (princ (buffer-name)))
7635
7636returns "The buffer is foo".
7637
7638** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7639is non-nil.
7640
7641These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7642buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7643characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7644
7645*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7646a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7647
7648Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7649character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7650Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7651position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7652characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7653 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7654
7655ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7656Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7657non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7658characters".
7659
7660The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7661through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7662"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7663range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7664leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7665
7666*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7667(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7668multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7669character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7670
7671This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7672always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7673
7674However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7675
7676*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7677because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7678have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7679the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7680guaranteed.
7681
7682*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7683between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7684character).
7685
7686When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7687
7688 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7689 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7690 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7691 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7692 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7693
7694*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7695
7696*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7697`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7698more than the number of characters.
7699
7700You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7701it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7702\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7703is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7704follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7705newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7706
7707*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7708and returns a string containing those characters.
7709
7710*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7711(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7712counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7713character, sref signals an error.
7714
7715*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7716in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7717string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7718
7719*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7720in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7721region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7722
7723*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7724the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7725to a vector of the characters in it.
7726
7727*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7728of a string. You call it as follows:
7729
7730 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7731
7732This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7733STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7734This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7735Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7736it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7737
7738*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7739if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7740
7741*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7742if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7743
7744*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7745to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7746not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7747which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7748
7749(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7750
7751This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7752
7753The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7754If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7755are not included in the resulting value.
7756
7757The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7758at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7759WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7760is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7761
7762If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7763place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7764character extends across that column), then the padding character
7765PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7766string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7767column START-COLUMN.
7768
7769*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7770the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7771necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7772difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7773changed text, before the change.
7774
7775*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7776sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7777one character set for each script, not for each language.
7778
7779**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7780
7781**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7782
7783**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7784set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7785
7786**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7787name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7788which identify the character within that character set.
7789
7790**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7791byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7792opposite of split-char.
7793
7794**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7795of all the characters between BEG and END.
7796
7797**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7798of all the characters in a string.
7799
7800*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7801and specifying coding systems.
7802
7803**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7804system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7805of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7806(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7807and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7808as what to do about code conversion.)
7809
7810**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7811name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7812
7813**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7814for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7815except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7816
7817Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7818which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7819to match against a file name.
7820
7821VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7822a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7823decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7824to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7825systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7826specifies the coding system for encoding.
7827
7828If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7829or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7830
7831**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7832the coding system to use for network sockets.
7833
7834Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7835which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7836either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7837service names.
7838
7839VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7840a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7841decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7842to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7843systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7844specifies the coding system for encoding.
7845
7846If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7847or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7848
7849**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7850for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7851except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7852start the subprocess.
7853
7854**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7855systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7856when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7857(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7858to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7859
7860**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7861coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7862subprocess.
7863
7864It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7865but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7866start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7867connection permanently or until overridden.
7868
7869The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7870file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7871network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7872coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7873It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7874system for one operation at a time.
7875
7876**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7877files, subprocesses or network connections.
7878
7879**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7880coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7881The value is a cons cell,
7882 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7883where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7884the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7885input to the subprocess.
7886
7887**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7888change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7889
7890** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7891customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7892you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7893
7894You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7895variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7896information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7897legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7898customization.
7899
7900Thus, instead of writing
7901
7902 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7903 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7904
7905you would now write this:
7906
7907 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7908 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7909 :type 'boolean
7910 :group foo)
7911
7912The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7913two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7914describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7915for a description of them.
7916
7917The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7918should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7919
7920 (defgroup ispell nil
7921 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7922 :group 'processes)
7923
7924The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7925group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7926but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7927to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7928second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7929
7930Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7931package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7932have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7933package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7934first-level subgroups.
7935
7936** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7937
7938This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7939separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7940
7941** easy-mmode
7942
7943The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7944developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7945only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7946predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7947`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7948`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7949
7950** Text property changes
7951
7952*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7953text property.
7954
7955*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7956previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7957place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7958functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7959starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7960
7961If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7962LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7963of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7964position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7965
7966*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7967value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7968is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7969
7970** Changes in invisibility features
7971
7972*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7973hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7974is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7975should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7976would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7977make the overlay visible.
7978
7979During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7980invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7981needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7982which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7983the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7984t when it should hide it.
7985
7986*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7987
7988Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7989invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7990and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7991Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7992manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7993Here is an example of how to do this:
7994
7995 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7996 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7997 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7998 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7999
8000 ...
8001 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8002
8003 ...
8004 ;; When done with the overlays:
8005 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8006 ;; Or respectively:
8007 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8008
8009** Changes in syntax parsing.
8010
8011*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8012`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8013obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8014`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8015
8016If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8017is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8018used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8019
8020When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8021character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8022
8023 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8024 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8025
8026 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8027 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8028 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8029
8030 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8031 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8032 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8033 determine the syntax type of the character.
8034
8035 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8036 of the current buffer.
8037
8038*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8039value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8040for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8041
8042*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8043and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8044only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8045character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8046another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8047
8048These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8049text property.
8050
8051*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8052arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8053of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8054
8055*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8056(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8057element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8058nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8059string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8060
8061*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8062syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8063`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8064
8065** Changes in face features
8066
8067*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8068if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8069
8070*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8071of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8072
8073*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8074set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8075
8076*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8077set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8078
8079*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8080by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8081and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8082the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8083overlay property).
8084
8085This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8086arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8087
8088** Changes in file-handling functions
8089
8090*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8091directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8092they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8093is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8094
8095This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8096begins with ~.
8097
8098*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8099it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8100
8101*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8102the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8103
8104*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8105as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8106
8107*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8108character code conversion as well as other things.
8109
8110Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8111(formerly it did not).
8112
8113*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8114environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8115
8116*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8117instead of constant strings.
8118
8119*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8120to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8121any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8122
8123substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8124in the same way as before.
8125
8126*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8127The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8128which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8129
8130*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8131error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8132else, and returns nil.
8133
8134*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8135directory cannot be listed.
8136
8137** Changes in minibuffer input
8138
8139*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8140read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8141additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8142argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8143ways:
8144
8145 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8146 It is available through the history command M-n.
8147
8148*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8149read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8150argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8151minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8152enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8153
8154In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8155argument in this way.
8156
8157*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8158from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8159minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8160
8161** Echo area features
8162
8163*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8164echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8165minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8166after the echo area is cleared.
8167
8168*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8169in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8170
8171** Keyboard input features
8172
8173*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8174set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8175
8176*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8177received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8178by keyboard macros.
8179
8180** Frame-related changes
8181
8182*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8183creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8184hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8185
8186*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8187the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8188has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8189
8190*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8191selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8192value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8193in the selected frame.
8194
8195*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8196is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8197which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8198
8199** X Windows features
8200
8201*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8202x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8203x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8204
8205*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8206The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8207
8208*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8209MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8210A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8211
8212If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8213it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8214
8215** Subprocess features
8216
8217*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8218functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8219automatically.
8220
8221*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8222and returns the output from the command as a string.
8223
8224*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8225and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8226
8227** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8228does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8229
8230** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8231at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8232goes after the other menu items.
8233
8234** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8235of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8236around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8237are in use.
8238
8239The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8240series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8241
8242Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8243after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8244form.
8245
8246** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8247is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8248but its hook is still run.
8249
8250** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8251for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8252
8253If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8254regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8255useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8256
8257This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8258are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8259filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8260warned.
8261
8262** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8263way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8264
8265** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8266integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8267functions like display-time.
8268
8269** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8270name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8271
8272** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8273can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8274is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8275
8276** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8277if there is an error in compilation.
8278
8279** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8280switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8281argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8282they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8283
8284** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8285Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8286the *scratch* buffer.
8287
8288** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8289The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8290where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8291e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8292
8293** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8294and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8295It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8296
8297** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8298using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8299variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8300and compose-mail-other-frame.
8301
8302** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8303can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8304full name of the specified user will be returned.
8305
8306** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8307of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8308where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8309in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8310option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8311files at all.
8312
8313** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8314and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8315width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8316the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8317
8318For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8319minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8320with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8321is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8322
8323** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8324
8325** imenu.el changes.
8326
8327You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8328item from menu created by imenu.
8329
8330An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8331#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8332select one of those items.
8333\f
8334* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8335\f
8336* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8337
8338** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8339mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8340
8341** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8342use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8343Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8344\f
8345* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8346
8347** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8348To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8349
8350** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8351conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8352matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8353expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8354word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8355all caps.
8356
8357** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8358at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8359
8360When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8361does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8362as in previous Emacs versions.
8363
8364** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8365non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8366time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8367frames.
8368
8369** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8370if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8371This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8372Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8373accident.
8374
8375** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8376keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8377It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8378line and then executing the macro.
8379
8380This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8381
8382** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8383(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8384characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8385characters.
8386
8387** Font Lock mode
8388
8389*** Font Lock support modes
8390
8391Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8392below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8393hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8394to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8395Font Lock mode is enabled.
8396
8397For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8398
8399 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8400
8401in your ~/.emacs.
8402
8403*** lazy-lock
8404
8405The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8406only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8407becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8408Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8409occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8410buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8411Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8412
8413To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8414
8415 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8416
8417To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8418
8419** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8420
8421*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8422paren and key.
8423
8424*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8425supported.
8426
8427** Gnus changes.
8428
8429Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8430commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8431significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8432previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8433
8434Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8435between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8436
8437*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8438variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8439obsolete.
8440
8441*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8442missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8443
8444 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8445
8446*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8447
8448 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8449
8450*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8451referred.
8452
8453*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8454
8455 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8456
8457*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8458
8459 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8460
8461*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8462buffers.
8463
8464 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8465
8466*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8467
8468 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8469
8470*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8471
8472 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8473
8474*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8475
8476 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8477
8478*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8479is possible.
8480
8481 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8482
8483*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8484groups of groups.
8485
8486*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8487
8488*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8489batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8490
8491*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8492
8493*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8494
8495*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8496
8497 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8498
8499*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8500expiration times.
8501
8502*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8503
8504*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8505process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8506
8507*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8508articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8509bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8510
8511*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8512articles with the `*' command.
8513
8514*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8515
8516*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8517
8518 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8519
8520*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8521
8522*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8523`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8524
8525*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8526buffer.
8527
8528*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8529
8530*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8531
8532*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8533
8534 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8535
8536*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8537
8538 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8539
8540*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8541
8542*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8543
8544*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8545
8546 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8547 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8548
8549*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8550refetching.
8551
8552 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8553
8554*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8555buffer to allow easier treatment.
8556
8557*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8558
8559*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8560
8561 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8562
8563*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8564articles.
8565
8566 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8567
8568*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8569
8570*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8571cited text to hide is now customizable.
8572
8573 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8574
8575*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8576
8577 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8578
8579*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8580
8581*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8582
8583The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8584in greater detail.
8585\f
8586* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8587
8588** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8589second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8590asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8591exists.
8592
8593** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8594as well as lists.
8595
8596** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8597of a given keymap.
8598
8599** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8600given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8601keymap or nil.
8602
8603** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8604an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8605name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8606menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8607equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8608alias.
8609\f
8610* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8611
8612** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8613
8614Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8615This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8616was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8617far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8618pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8619
8620For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8621you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8622`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8623
8624** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8625
8626The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8627do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8628It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8629much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8630chapter of the manual for details.
8631
8632However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8633customization variables take effect.
8634
8635** Marking with the mouse.
8636
8637When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8638highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8639using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8640
8641** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8642
8643*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8644
8645*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8646to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8647
8648*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8649in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8650you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8651application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8652applications, these problems are significant.
8653
8654If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8655likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8656However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8657will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8658other DOS application as a subprocess.
8659
8660Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8661You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8662
8663If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8664subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8665have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8666Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8667separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8668Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8669
8670** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8671
8672This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8673which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8674minibuffer contains.
8675
8676** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8677
8678The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8679It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8680It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8681affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8682
8683The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8684it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8685and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8686when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8687
8688** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8689enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8690
8691** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8692F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8693Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8694
8695If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8696menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8697something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8698the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8699
8700 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8701
8702** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8703to replace the characters it "deletes".
8704
8705** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8706
8707** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8708a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8709select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8710It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8711immediately after the selected one.
8712
8713This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8714made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8715
8716** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8717
8718Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8719directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8720If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8721Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8722recover-session.
8723
8724You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8725auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8726will not work.
8727
8728Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8729normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8730this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8731bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8732now that the bug is fixed.
8733
8734** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8735
8736There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8737when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8738Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8739which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8740
8741If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8742telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8743VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8744the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8745
8746** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8747Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8748is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8749
8750There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8751Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8752enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8753The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8754remain normal.
8755
8756** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8757header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8758
8759Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8760known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8761offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8762Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8763
8764Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8765of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8766a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8767name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8768documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8769`mail-directory-stream'.)
8770
8771** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8772skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8773characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8774with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8775
8776Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8777- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8778wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8779
8780The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8781less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8782headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8783Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8784Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8785fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8786to a limitation in font-lock).
8787
8788External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8789
8790** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8791buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8792buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8793this example:
8794
8795 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8796 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8797
8798** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8799
8800*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8801
8802*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8803
8804*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8805
8806*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8807entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8808will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8809isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8810(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8811The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8812
8813*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8814does the same job.
8815
8816*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8817"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8818
8819*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8820text.
8821
8822** Font Lock mode
8823
8824*** Global Font Lock mode
8825
8826Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8827new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8828font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8829turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8830on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8831
8832For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8833
8834 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8835
8836in your ~/.emacs.
8837
8838*** Local Refontification
8839
8840In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8841However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8842those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8843command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8844
8845In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8846(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8847current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8848above and below point.
8849
8850With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8851
8852** Follow mode
8853
8854Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8855buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8856side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8857they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8858split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8859follow-mode.
8860
8861M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8862
8863To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8864command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8865
8866** hide-show changes.
8867
8868The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8869to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8870normal hooks.
8871
8872** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8873The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8874
8875** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8876recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8877those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8878
8879** MSDOS Changes
8880
8881*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8882Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8883
8884*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8885and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8886
8887*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8888
8889*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8890pressing both mouse buttons.
8891
8892*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8893restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8894are:
8895
8896**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8897now works.
8898
8899**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8900
8901**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8902implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8903
8904**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8905
8906**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8907
8908**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8909
8910**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8911
8912**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8913\f
8914* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8915
8916** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8917tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8918remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8919this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8920behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8921
8922** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8923
8924The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8925not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8926need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8927be different.
8928
8929It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8930than `system-type'.
8931
8932See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8933
8934** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8935now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8936
8937** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8938that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8939
8940** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8941no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8942reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8943
8944The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8945to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8946like this:
8947
8948 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8949
8950SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8951It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8952becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8953
8954REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8955seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8956means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8957
8958*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8959up if too much time passes.
8960
8961 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8962
8963This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8964If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8965of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8966form in BODY.
8967
8968*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8969a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8970call looks like this:
8971
8972 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8973
8974SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8975runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8976timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8977ARGS.
8978
8979Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8980command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8981command.
8982
8983REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8984time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8985does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8986each time Emacs becomes idle.
8987
8988If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8989idle for SECS seconds.
8990
8991*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8992all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8993programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8994instead.
8995
8996*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8997there is no answer within a certain time.
8998
8999 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9000
9001asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9002within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9003Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9004
9005** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9006arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9007meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9008arguments in between are ignored.
9009
9010This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9011the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9012
9013** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9014/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9015/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9016site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9017version.
9018
9019It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9020version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9021for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9022has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9023and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9024problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9025
9026** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9027.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9028systems with limited file name syntax.
9029
9030Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9031convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9032for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9033completions.el:
9034
9035(defvar save-completions-file-name
9036 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9037 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9038
9039This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9040depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9041convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9042Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9043MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9044
9045** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9046rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9047minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9048
9049** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9050marker from its buffer position.
9051
9052** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9053Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9054The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9055
9056** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9057that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9058condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9059of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9060matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9061regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9062
9063This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9064errors that happen often during editing.
9065
9066** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9067into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9068puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9069
9070** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9071now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9072
9073** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9074a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9075name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9076to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9077and not get-buffer-window.
9078
9079** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9080calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9081being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9082
9083If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9084buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9085property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9086non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9087are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9088property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9089over and over for the same text.
9090
9091** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9092
9093*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9094in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9095
9096;; @(#) HEADER: text
9097;; $HEADER: text $
9098
9099in addition to the normal
9100
9101;; HEADER: text
9102
9103*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9104checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9105lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9106
9107
a933dad1 9108\f
3787e12e 9109* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9110
9111----------------------------------------------------------------------
9112Copyright information:
9113
424d8b44 9114Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9115
9116 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9117 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9118 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9119 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9120
9121 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9122 of this document, or of portions of it,
9123 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9124 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9125\f
9126Local variables:
9127mode: outline
9128paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9129end: